JP6936374B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

For gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, for example, it is proposed to improve the production by moving a moving body provided so as to be movable from the first position to the second position (for example, in the vertical direction). Has been done.

As a pachinko gaming machine equipped with this type of movable body, for example, assuming that the moving body can be moved from the first position to the second position, at the second position, a regulating member for receiving the movement of the moving body and the movement thereof. Some have a cushioning member provided between the end of the body (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Further, there is a gaming machine capable of executing a predetermined advance notice effect that makes the display mode of the identification information difficult to see at the start of variable display of the identification information (see, for example, Patent Document 2). In Patent Document 2, as shown in FIG. 20 (B), a darkened image 83 is displayed on the entire screen of the liquid crystal display 42 at the start of fluctuation, and the display mode of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c is made difficult to see, such as a blackout effect. It is disclosed that a notice effect that covers the screen) is executed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-198754 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-12265

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 2 , it may be difficult to understand the movement of the identification information due to a predetermined advance notice effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the display mode of the identification information, and it is not possible to improve the interest of the game. There is a problem.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the movement of identification information from becoming difficult to understand and improving the interest of the game.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present application is a gaming machine capable of playing and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and the identification information is variably displayed in a predetermined direction. A variable display means and a notice effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined notice effect are provided, and the predetermined notice effect is executed so as to make the variable display of the identification information invisible or difficult to see, and is stopped and displayed. After executing a specific start for starting the identification information in a specific direction different from the predetermined direction, the predetermined advance notice effect is executed, and after the end of the predetermined advance notice effect, the identification information is variably displayed in the predetermined direction. It is possible to start, the specific effect can be executed in the display area common to the predetermined advance notice effect, and the specific effect can be executed at the first timing when the predetermined advance notice effect is executed. When the predetermined advance notice effect is not executed, the specific effect can be executed at a second timing different from the first timing, and is controlled to the advantageous state together with the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect. It is possible to display a suggestion display suggesting the above, and the suggestion display is characterized in that it is displayed with priority over the predetermined advance notice effect.
(1) The other gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, 600) is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like), and the identification information (for example, a decorative pattern or the like) is directed in a predetermined direction. The processing of the variable display means (for example, the image display device 5 and the like) and the notice effect execution means (for example, steps S322A and S344A) capable of executing a predetermined advance notice effect (for example, full-screen notice effect). An effect control CPU 120 or the like to be executed), a moving body (for example, a movable body 302) that can move between the first position and a second position different from the first position, and the moving body being the first position. When the moving body moves from the second position to the second position, the first regulating section (for example, the driving bodies 310L and 310R) that regulates the movement of the moving body to the side opposite to the first position, and the first regulating section move the moving body. When the movement of the body is restricted at the second position, the second regulating unit (for example, the cover member 307L) that regulates the movement of the moving body to the side opposite to the first position via the first regulating unit is used. , 307R lower parts 336L, 336R), first impact mitigation means (for example, first elastic members 334L, 334R) for alleviating the impact generated between the moving body and the first regulation portion, and the first regulation. A second impact mitigating means (for example, second elastic members 335L, 335R) for alleviating an impact generated between the portion and the second regulating portion is provided (see, for example, FIGS. 8 and 9), and the predetermined one is provided. The advance notice effect is executed so that the display mode of the identification information is invisible or difficult to see at the start of the variable display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S322A and S344A makes FIG. 41 (B2). ), Blackout effect in which the decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 43 (B2) or FIG. 45 (B2) becomes invisible), the identification information is used when the predetermined advance notice effect is executed. It is possible to start the variable display in the predetermined direction after the execution period of the advance notice effect elapses (for example, FIG. 41 (B2), FIG. 43 (B2) or FIG. After the execution period of the blackout effect shown in FIG. 45 (B2) has elapsed, in the forward direction of the decorative pattern as shown in FIGS. 41 (D2), (E2), 43 (D), (E) or 45 (D2). It is characterized by the fact that the fluctuation of

According to such a configuration, the impact generated when the movement of the moving body is regulated can be effectively mitigated.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), the first regulation unit (for example, drive bodies 310L, 310R) is provided so as to be movable, and a predetermined drive source (for example, production motors 308L, 308R, drive gear) is provided. 338, driven gear 339, guide shafts 306L, 306R, groove 321) drives the moving body (for example, the movable body 302) to move from the second position to the first position (for example, FIGS. 9 and 9). 12), you may do so.

According to such a configuration, the movement of the moving body and the regulation can be combined with one member, so that the number of parts can be reduced.

(3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), the second position is provided below the first position, and the moving body (for example, the movable body 302) is the first position by its own weight. It may be possible to drop from the second position to the second position (see, for example, FIG. 11B).

According to such a configuration, the impact due to the dropping of the moving body can be suitably mitigated.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above, the second regulating unit (for example, the lower parts 336L and 336R of the cover members 307L and 307R) is the moving body (for example, the movable body 302). It may be provided in the base portion (for example, the base portion 301) that supports the above (see, for example, FIGS. 4 and 5).

According to such a configuration, the impact generated by the regulation can be transmitted to the base member supporting the moving body and dispersed, so that the moving body can be stably regulated at the second position.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the means (5) to (16) shown below. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-12265 describes, for example, a predetermined advance notice effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the display mode of the identification information at the start of variable display of the identification information (in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-122265, FIG. 20 (B). ), It is possible to perform a notice effect that covers the entire screen, such as a blackout effect that displays a darkened image 83 on the entire screen of the liquid crystal display 42 at the start of fluctuation and makes it difficult to see the display mode of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c. A game machine is disclosed. In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2006-122265, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to understand the movement of the identification information due to a predetermined advance notice effect such as making the display mode of the identification information difficult to see, which improves the interest of the game. I can't let you. The inventions according to the means (5) to (16) have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the identification information from becoming difficult to understand and improving the interest of the game. The purpose is to do.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4), the predetermined direction is a normal direction (for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 (D1), (D2), (E1), (E2). (For example, the forward direction of the decorative pattern).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the identification information from becoming difficult to understand.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above, the predetermined advance notice effect is an effect that suggests an expectation that an advantageous state is obtained, and is an embodiment in which a part or the whole of the identification information is hidden. (For example, as shown in FIG. 35 (B), the full-screen notice effect is more likely to be displayed in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss, and is an effect in which the entire decorative pattern is hidden. (See FIG. 41 (B2)), etc.).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the identification information from becoming difficult to understand.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6), the variable display means variably displays the identification information in a specific direction (for example, a reverse direction) different from the predetermined direction. (For example, by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of steps S322C and S345B, the decorative design is variable in the reverse direction different from the forward direction as shown in FIGS. 41 (B1) and 43 (B1). It may be displayed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the direction of the variable display becomes various, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(8) In the gaming machine of the above (7), the variable display means variably displays the identification information in the specific direction at least during the execution period of the predetermined advance notice effect (for example, FIG. 40B). As shown in FIG. 47, at least during the execution period of the full-screen notice effect, the decorative symbol may be variably displayed in the opposite direction).

According to such a configuration, the identification information can be variably displayed in a specific direction and then variably displayed in a predetermined direction different from the specific direction, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(9) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (8) above, the identification information notice can be executed at the start of the variable display in the predetermined direction (for example, the effect of executing the processes of steps S322B and S345). The control CPU 120 may be able to execute the symbol advance notice effect as shown in FIGS. 41 (B1) and 45 (B1)).

According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved by executing the identification information notice.

(10) In the gaming machine of the above (9), when the identification information notice and the predetermined notice effect are executed, the identification information notice is executed after the end of the predetermined notice effect (for example, the process of step S322D). After the end of the full-screen notice effect shown in FIGS. 41 (C2) and 45 (C2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the symbol advance notice effect as shown in FIGS. 41 (D2) and 45 (D2). Etc.), you may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the identification information notice and the predetermined notice effect from being executed at the same time, and the identification information notice becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the predetermined notice effect. Can be prevented.

(11) In any of the game machines (1) to (10) above, an adjustment means (for example, a step) capable of adjusting the effect according to the adjustment operation (adjustment operation) by the player during at least the execution of the variable display. An effect control CPU 120 or the like that executes the processes of S706 and S707 and an adjustment image (for example, the adjustment result image R shown in FIGS. 46B to 46D) corresponding to the adjustment by the adjustment means are displayed for a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined period). Period T1) The adjusted image display means for displaying (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for executing the processes of steps S708, S703, and S704) is provided, and the adjusted image display means derives a variable display result within the predetermined period. When displayed, the adjusted image cannot be visually recognized during the period in which the variable display result is derived and displayed (for example, the derived display period T2) (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the processes of steps S710 to S712). It is characterized in that it is difficult to see (for example, the adjusted image is displayed semi-transparently or blinks).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in recognizability of the variable display result that is derived and displayed.

(12) In the gaming machine of the above (11), at least a part of the display area of the adjusted image overlaps with at least a part of the derived display area of the variable display result (see, for example, FIG. 31 (A)). May be good.

According to such a configuration, since the adjusted image result image that overlaps with at least a part of the derived display area of the variable display result is erased, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the visibility of the variable display result.

(13) In the gaming machine according to (11) or (12) above, the error image may not be deleted even during the derivation display of the variable display result (see, for example, FIG. 31 (D2)).

According to such a configuration, the visibility of the error image can be ensured.

(14) In any of the game machines (11) to (13) above, the display of the error image is prioritized over the display of the adjustment image (for example, for effect control in which the abnormality notification command is received in the process of step S57). The CPU 120 may continue to display the error image as shown in FIGS. 17 (D1) and 17 (D2) until the error indicated by the command is resolved).

According to such a configuration, the visibility of the error image can be ensured.

(15) In any of the gaming machines (11) to (14) above, when the adjustment operation is performed, the demo display is kept visible (see, for example, FIG. 31 (B)), but the menu display operation. Is performed, the demo display may be erased (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the processes of steps S659, S660, and S662).

According to such a configuration, a demo display can be preferably performed.

(16) In any of the game machines (11) to (15) above, a determination means (for example, the process of step S239) for determining whether or not to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. A display means (for example, steps S325, S348, S350) for variably displaying the identification information and deriving and displaying the variable display result according to the determination result of the game control microcomputer 100, etc. (Effect CPU 120 or the like for executing the process of The specific effect image can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of at least a part of the identification information (see, for example, FIG. 29B), and the specific effect execution means. In the period in which the variable display result of the identification information is derived, the display mode of the specific effect image is set to the stationary mode at a position overlapping on the front side of the identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets step S609). The part that executes the processing of), etc.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent misidentification of the display result.

It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the game control board (main board). (A) is a front view showing the effect unit in which the movable body is in the first position, and (B) is a front view showing the effect unit in which the movable body is in the second position. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which the production unit was seen diagonally from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which the production unit was seen from diagonally behind. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 3, and FIG. 3B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB. (A) is a front view showing the effect unit in which the movable body is in the second position, and (B) is a rear view showing the effect unit in which the movable body is in the second position. (A) is an enlarged view of C in FIG. 7, and (B) is an enlarged view of D in FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE of FIG. 8 (B), and FIG. 8 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF of FIG. 8 (B). (A) is an explanatory view showing the state of the movable body in the first position, (B) is an explanatory view showing the state of the movable body in the third position, and (C) is the state of the movable body in the second position. It is explanatory drawing which shows. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the state of the movable body and the state of the effect solenoid when it is in the first position, and (B) is the state of the movable body that has fallen from the state of (A) to the second position and for effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a solenoid. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the state of the movable body at the initial stage of the operation of returning from the second position to the first position and the state of the solenoid for effect, and (B) is the movement of the latter stage of the operation of returning from the second position to the first position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a body and the state of a solenoid for effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the 2nd movable part moves from the state which faces substantially horizontal to the 2nd position. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the impact due to the fall of the movable body is not transmitted to the first elastic member at the second position, and (B) is (A) the impact due to the fall of the movable body to the first elastic member. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transmitted state. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss. It is a figure which shows the setting example of various commands. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern in embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination example of the fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the character display processing for change effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific setting which displays various images. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect setting process. It is a figure which shows the display example such as an adjustment result image. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the display period of the adjustment result image and the derivation display period of a variable display result. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a full-screen notice effect setting process, and (B) is a diagram showing a determination example of a full-screen notice effect. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the symbol advance notice effect setting process, (B) is a diagram showing a determination example of the symbol advance notice effect, and (C) is a diagram showing a determination example of the type of the symbol advance notice effect. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a symbol reverse start display setting process, and (B) is a diagram showing a determination example of a symbol reverse start display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the symbol notice effect timing adjustment processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the fluctuation of a decorative pattern and each notice production. It is a figure which shows the production execution example. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the fluctuation of a decorative pattern and each notice production. It is a figure which shows the production execution example. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the fluctuation of a decorative pattern and each notice production. It is a figure which shows the production execution example. It is a figure which shows the production execution example. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the variation of the decorative pattern of the modification 1 and each notice effect. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the symbol reverse start display setting process of the modified example 2, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of determining the type of the symbol reverse start display of the modified example 2. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the variation of the decorative pattern of the modification 3 and each notice production. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example of the modification 3.

[First Embodiment]
A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board. In the following, the front side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the back side is the back (rear) side, and the vertical and horizontal directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front side. It will be explained as a standard. The front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is a facing surface facing the player playing the game with the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. The pachinko game machine (hereinafter, may be abbreviated as a game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) for supporting and fixing the game board 2. It is composed of 3. The game board 2 is formed with a game area 10 having a substantially circular shape in front view surrounded by guide rails 2b. A game ball as a game medium is launched from a hitting ball launching device (not shown) into the gaming area 10. Further, the game machine frame 3 is provided with a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area 10 can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area 10 can be seen through the glass window 50a.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, and a methacrylic resin, and is formed in a substantially square shape on the front surface. It is mainly composed of a board surface plate (not shown) provided with a guide rail 2b or the like (not shown) and a spacer member (not shown) integrally attached to the back surface side of the board surface plate. The game board 2 may be made of plywood.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, a lower right position of the game area 10). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are each composed of, for example, 7 segments or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes), and are identified in a special symbol game which is an example of a variable display game. A special symbol (also referred to as a "special figure"), which is a plurality of types of possible identification information (special identification information), is displayed in a variable manner (also referred to as a variable display or a variable display). Hereinafter, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". ..

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area 10 on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the variation display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game are supported. For example, in a decorative symbol display area that is a plurality of variable display units such as three, a decorative symbol that is a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can identify each of them (the decorative symbol is also referred to as a "directing symbol". ) Is displayed in a variable manner. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A or the special figure using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is used. Synchronized with the figure game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified by each are displayed in a variable manner, and a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is a variable display result is derived and displayed.

The image display device 5 is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 and can be visually recognized through the opening 2c formed in the game board 2. A frame-shaped center decorative frame 51 is provided in the opening 2c of the game board 2. An effect unit 300, which will be described later, is provided between the back surface of the game board 2 and the image display device 5.

A first reserved storage display area 5D and a second reserved storage display area 5U are set at two locations on the left and right below the display area of the image display device 5. In the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U, the hold storage display for identifiablely displaying the hold storage number (special figure hold storage number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed.

Here, the holding of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is such that the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. It occurs based on the starting prize by (entering). That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Will be done.

At the right position of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, there are a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B for identifiable display of the number of special symbol hold storages. It is provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first special figure hold storage identifiable, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second special figure hold storage identifiable.

A normal winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a normal variable winning ball device 6B is provided below the right side of the image display device 5. The ordinary winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The normal variable winning ball device 6B is in a closed state in which it protrudes into the game area 10 and in an open state in which it is retracted from the game area 10 by the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory shown in FIG. It is provided with a normal electric accessory having a variable movable plate, and forms a second start winning opening as a start area (second start area).

Based on the fact that the game balls that have passed (entered) the first start winning opening are detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. If the number of reserved storages is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the first start condition is satisfied. Further, based on the fact that the game balls that have passed (entered) the second start winning opening are detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second If the number of reserved special figures is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the second start condition is satisfied.

As shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 7 is provided at a position to the right of the normal winning ball device 6A. The special variable winning ball device 7 forms a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door that is opened and closed and driven by the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. .. In this way, the large winning opening as a specific area is an open state in which the game ball is easy to pass (enter), which is advantageous for the player, and a player who cannot pass (enter) (or is difficult to enter) the game ball. It changes to a closed state that is disadvantageous for.

Based on the fact that the game balls that have passed (entered) the large winning opening are detected by the count switch 23 shown in FIG. 2, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Therefore, if the large winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball can enter the large winning opening, which is a first state advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the large winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to pass (enter) the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. It becomes a disadvantageous second state.

An ordinary symbol display 20 is provided at a position to the right of the second hold display 25B. To the right of the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal figure hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, at the lowermost part of the game area 10, there is provided an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and further, an effect LED 9 is provided at the peripheral portion of the gaming area 10. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a gaming ball as a gaming medium toward the gaming area 10 is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area 10, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine can be supplied to a launching device (not shown). An upper plate 90 (ball hitting plate) for holding (storing) the ball is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower plate 91 is provided to hold (store) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate 90 so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The tilting operation of the stick controller 31A attached to the member forming the lower plate 91 is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A, and the pressing operation performed on the push button 31B provided on the member forming the upper plate 90 is pushed. It is detected by the sensor 35B.

Next, the circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko game machine 1, for example, as shown in FIG. 2, various types of transmissions are transmitted between the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. Various boards such as a relay board 15 for relaying a control signal, a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and an LED control board are arranged.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function. Further, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted on the main board 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 receives detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 that detect the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41. The wiring to be transmitted is connected. In addition, display control of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20, the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, and the like is performed. The wiring that transmits the command signal for is connected.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a variation pattern designation command indicating a variation pattern indicating a variation mode such as a variation time of a decorative symbol, a type of reach effect, and the presence / absence of a pseudo-ream.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and provides a ROM 101 (ReadOnlyMemory101) for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for game control. RAM 102 (RandomAccessMemory102), a CPU 103 (CentralProcessingUnit103) that executes a game control program to perform control operations, a random number circuit 104 that updates numerical data indicating a random value independently of the CPU 103, and an I / O 105. (Input / Output port 105) and. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103.

As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, and receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 to display an image. Devices 5, speakers 8L, 8R, effect LED 9, effect motors 308L, 308R, lower position detection switches 313L, 313R, intermediate position detection switches 314L, 314R, upper position detection switches 315L, 315R, effect solenoids 318L, 318R. Various circuits for controlling the production operation by the electric parts for the production and various circuits for detecting the operation of the electric parts such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are installed.

The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 120, and an image display device. The display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in 5, the random number circuit 124 that updates the numerical data indicating the random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120, and the I / O 125. And are installed. As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, thereby executing the process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components. Further, in the ROM 121, in addition to the effect control program, various data tables and the like used for controlling the effect operation are stored.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the gaming area 10, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. After starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, if the predetermined time that is the normal symbol fluctuation time elapses and the normal symbol other than the normal symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is "out of normal symbol". Become. If a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol", and the open control for retracting the movable plate of the normal variable winning ball device 6B from the game area 10 is performed. Then, when a predetermined time elapses, the normal opening control is performed to return to the closed position protruding into the game area 10.

Based on the fact that after the first start condition is satisfied due to the game ball winning the first start winning opening, for example, the first start condition is satisfied due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, for example. , The special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started. In addition, after the second start condition is satisfied due to the game ball winning the second start winning opening, for example, the second start condition is satisfied due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state. Based on this, the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the special symbol game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started, the confirmed special symbol (special symbol display result) is derived and displayed when the variable display time elapses. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit", the game is controlled to a big hit game state as a specific game state in which a round (also referred to as a "round game") advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times.

In the big hit game state, the big winning door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls. The big prize opening will be open until the occurrence of. As a result, a round is executed in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

The large winning opening door that opens the large winning opening during the execution of the round catches the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closes the large winning opening, thereby causing a special variable winning ball device. 7 is changed to a second state (closed state) which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. The round, which is the opening cycle of the big winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "16").

In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the start of the special symbol game. Then, in the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display, the variable display state of the decorative symbol may be in a predetermined reach state. The reach state is a display in which the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 form a part of the jackpot combination, and the decorative symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed continue to fluctuate. It is a state, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols are synchronously fluctuating while forming all or part of the jackpot combination.

As a definite special symbol in the special figure game, among a plurality of types of jackpot combinations, a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined normal jackpot combination (also referred to as "non-probability variable jackpot combination") is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "non-probable variable jackpot". If it becomes, the jackpot state is controlled, and after the end, the time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed. By performing the time reduction control, the fluctuation display time (special figure fluctuation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving control, so-called electric chew support is implemented in which the winning frequency of the normal symbol is increased and the winning frequency of the normal variable winning ball device 6B is increased. In the time saving control, one of the conditions that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big hit game state and that the variable display result becomes "big hit" is satisfied first. Sometimes you just have to quit.

As a definite special symbol in the special figure game, among a plurality of types of jackpot combinations, a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination (also referred to as "probability variation jackpot combination") is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "probability variation jackpot". If it becomes a big hit, it is controlled to a big hit state, and after the end, probability fluctuation control (probability variation control) is performed together with time reduction control. By performing this probability variation control, the probability that the variation display result becomes a "big hit" in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than in the normal state. In the probability variation control, when the condition that the fluctuation display result becomes "big hit" and the game is controlled to the big hit game state again after the end of the big hit game state is satisfied, a predetermined number of times (for example, 100, which is the same as the time reduction number) after the end of the big hit game state is satisfied. When the special figure game of (times) is executed, it is decided that "there is a probability change fall" to end the probability change control in the probability change fall lottery that is executed every time the special figure game is started after the jackpot game state ends. When, etc., it should end.

When the time reduction control is performed, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal diagram game is made shorter than that in the normal state, and the variation display result of the normal symbol in each normal diagram game is "normal diagram". The control to improve the probability of "hit" compared to the normal state, and the movement control time to control the movement of the movable plate in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the fact that the variation display result is "hit" is usually set. There is a possibility that the second starting condition will be satisfied by making it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) the second starting winning opening, such as control to make it longer than in the state and control to increase the number of movements compared to the normal state. Controls (electric chew support control, high open control) that are advantageous to the player are performed by increasing the value. This makes it easier to establish the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure, and the special figure game can be executed frequently, so that the variable display result is "big hit" next. The time until becomes is shortened.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. When the game control timer interrupt process is started in the game control main process, switch process, main side error process, information output process, game random number update process, special symbol process process, normal symbol process process, and command control process are executed.

In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit (not shown) is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the first 2 Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation in the special symbol display device 4B and set the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

In the special symbol process processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is a first start prize or a second start prize, and if there is a prize, it is for determining the special symbol display result, for determining the jackpot type, and the variation pattern. A start winning process is executed in which random values for determination and the like are extracted and stored (stored) at the highest level of free entries in the first special figure reservation storage unit and the second special figure reservation storage unit.

Further, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to start the special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit and the second special figure hold storage unit, and the special figure display result. Based on the numerical data indicating the random value for judgment, it is decided (predetermined) whether or not the variation display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" before the variation display result is derived and displayed. Executes normal symbol processing. That is, when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the special figure game, whether or not to derive and display the jackpot display result as the display result of the variable display based on the random number value stored when the start winning is generated. Execute the process of determining (lottery).

Next, a variation pattern setting process for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types, a special symbol variation process for setting to change the special symbol and a process for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol, Stops the fluctuation of the special symbol and confirms. Performs the special symbol stop processing that sets the stop display (derivation) of the special symbol. When the variable display result is "big hit", the big hit opening pre-processing, the big hit opening processing, the big hit opening post-processing, and the big hit end processing are performed to open and close the big winning opening in the big hit game state.

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. First, the effect control CPU 120 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. When a timer interrupt occurs in the main process, command analysis process, effect control process process, and effect random number update process are executed.

In the effect control process process, the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U of the image display device 5 is updated to the display according to the storage contents of the hold storage buffer. To execute. Next, according to the value of the effect control process flag, the variation pattern specification command reception waiting process for confirming whether or not the variation pattern specification command is received from the game control microcomputer 100, and the variation of the decorative symbol are started. In addition to controlling the switching timing of each fluctuation state (fluctuation speed) that composes the fluctuation pattern according to the process data set in the decorative symbol fluctuation start processing and the decorative symbol fluctuation start processing to be controlled, and monitoring the end of the fluctuation time. , Display control of the image display device 5, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, light emission of the effect LED 9 and drive control of the effect unit 300, etc. Decorative symbol fluctuation stop processing is performed to control the derivation and display of the symbol).

In the jackpot display process, after the end of the fluctuation time, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot. In the processing during the big hit game, control is performed during the big hit game. In the jackpot end effect processing, the image display device 5 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 can execute various game-related effects such as variable display control of decorative patterns and advance notice effects based on the effect control commands (control information) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100. Has been done.

As the notice effect to be executed by the effect control CPU 120 during the variable display of the decorative symbol, for example, a big hit notice effect suggesting the possibility of a big hit, a reach notice suggesting whether or not to reach, and a stop symbol are used. Multiple notices to be executed at the start of fluctuation display or when the reach is established, such as a stop symbol notice to be announced and a latent notice to notify whether the game state is a probability fluctuation state (whether or not it is hidden). include.

In this embodiment, a movable body effect by the movable body 302 of the effect unit 300 described below, a combined effect by the effect unit 300, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the effect LED 9, and a player using the stick controller 31A or a push button. It is said that various effects such as an operation effect executed on the condition that the 31B is operated can be executed as various notices.

Next, the effect unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 9. 3A and 3B are a front view showing an effect unit in which the movable body is in the first position, and FIG. 3B is a front view showing the effect unit in which the movable body is in the second position. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the effect unit is viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the effect unit is viewed from diagonally behind. 6A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 3, and FIG. 6B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB. 7A and 7B are a front view showing an effect unit in which the movable body is in the second position, and FIG. 7B is a rear view showing the effect unit in which the movable body is in the second position. 8A is an enlarged view of C in FIG. 7, and FIG. 8B is an enlarged view of D in FIG. 9A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE of FIG. 8B, and FIG. 9B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF of FIG. 8B.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the effect unit 300 is provided between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2, and is formed in a substantially downward U-shape in front view. A movable body that can move to the base portion 301, a first position (see FIG. 3 (A)) above the base portion 301, and a second position (see FIG. 3 (B)) below the first position. It has 302, first guide means 303L, 303R and second guide means 319 for guiding the movement of the movable body 302.

The base portion 301 is formed in a substantially U-shape downward by the upper side portion 301a, the left side portion 301b, and the right side portion 301c, and each upper side portion 301a, the left side portion 301b, and the right side portion 301c are displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. It is arranged along each side so that the display screen of the image display device 5 can be visually recognized from between the upper side portion 301a, the left side portion 301b, and the right side portion 301c (see FIG. 1).

As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, first guide means 303L and 303R for guiding the first movable portion 302A, which will be described later, in the vertical direction are provided on the front surfaces of the left side portion 301b and the right side portion 301c of the base portion 301. It is provided. The first guide means 303L, 303R is a cover member 307L, which is fixed so as to sandwich the guide shafts 306L, 306R extending in the vertical direction with respect to the guide shafts 306L, 306R extending in the vertical direction and the left side side portion 301b and the right side side portion 301c so as to sandwich the guide shafts 306L, 306R from the front side. It is mainly composed of 307R.

The guide shafts 306L and 306R include upper bearing portions 304L and 304R fixed to the upper front surface of the left side portion 301b and the right side portion 301c, and lower bearing portions 305L and 305R provided on the lower rear surface of the cover members 307L and 307R. Is rotatably supported around the axis. Concave groove portions 321 are spirally formed on the peripheral surfaces of the guide shafts 306L and 306R.

Further, as shown in the right figures of FIGS. 11 and 12, a driven gear 339 is fixed to the upper ends of the guide shafts 306L and 306R, and is above the guide shafts 306L and 306R (upper bearing portions 304L and 304R). The effect motors 308L and 308R are fixed. The effect motors 308L and 308R are provided so that the drive shaft 337 projects downward, and the drive gear 338 fixed to the tip of the drive shaft 337 meshes with the driven gear 339 of the guide shafts 306L and 306R. Has been done. Therefore, by driving the effect motors 308L and 308R, the guide shafts 306L and 306R rotate around the axis.

Returning to FIGS. 4 and 5, the guide shafts 306L and 306R are arranged with arms 309L and 309R extending in the left-right direction from the first movable portion 302A and movable bodies 302 arranged below the arms 309L and 309R from the second position. The drive bodies 310L and 310R that move to the first position are attached so as to be able to move up and down. The mounting form of the arms 309L, 309R and the drive bodies 310L, 310R with respect to the guide shafts 306L, 306R will be described later.

Further, the cover members 307L and 307R are provided with recessed grooves 312L and 312R for guiding the vertical movement of the drive bodies 310L and 310R and the first movable portion 302A. In the recessed grooves 312L and 312R, the restricting pieces 311L and 311R extending to the front side of the drive bodies 310L and 310R and the restricting pieces 317L and 317R extending to the front side of the arms 309L and 309R of the first movable portion 302A are inserted. This guides the vertical movement of the drive bodies 310L and 310R and the first movable portion 302A (see FIGS. 8A and 9A and 9B).

Further, in the concave grooves 312L and 312R, an intermediate position between the upper position detection switches 315L and 315R for detecting the regulation pieces 317L and 317R of the arms 309L and 309R and the concave grooves 312L and 312R at the upper positions of the concave grooves 312L and 312R. Intermediate position detection switches 314L, 314R (see FIG. 4) for detecting the regulation pieces 311L and 311R of the drive bodies 310L and 310R, and detection pieces 316L of the drive bodies 310L and 310R at positions below the recessed grooves 312L and 312R. Lower position detection switches 313L and 313R for detecting 316R are provided (see FIGS. 10 to 12).

Further, the cover members 307L and 307R are provided with effect solenoids 318L and 318R for holding the movable body 302 at a position (first position) overlapping the upper side portion 301a in the front-rear direction.

The effect solenoids 318L and 318R are provided with a locking member 318a that can move forward and backward as shown in the right figures of FIGS. 11 and 12. When the effect solenoids 318L and 318R are off, the locking member 318a projects toward the guide shafts 306L and 306R. That is, when the effect solenoids 318L and 318R are off, the first movable portion 302A can be locked to the locking member 318a to hold the movable body 302 in the first position. Further, as shown in FIG. 11B, when the effect solenoid 318L is on, the locking member 318a is retracted from the guide shafts 306L and 306R. That is, when the effect solenoids 318L and 318R are on, the movable body 302 can be dropped to the second position by releasing the locked state between the first movable portion 302A and the locking member 318a.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the upper side portion 301a of the base portion 301 is provided with a second guiding means 319 for guiding the movement between the first position and the second position of the second movable portion 302B. The second guide means 319 includes guide portions 324L and 324R arranged apart from each other on the left and right sides, a connecting plate member 341 for connecting the guide portions 324L and 324R, and a third decoration described later attached to the connecting plate member 341. It is mainly composed of a member 320. The guide portions 324L and 324R and the connecting plate member 341 are integrally formed of a translucent member having translucency.

Further, the third decorative member 320 is mainly composed of a non-translucent member, and a translucent portion 320a having translucency is formed in a part thereof. Further, an LED substrate (not shown) provided with a plurality of effect LEDs on the front surface is attached to the upper side portion 301a of the base portion 301, and the light from the effect LEDs is emitted from the connecting plate member 341 and the translucent portion. It is possible to emit light to the front side via 320a.

As shown in FIG. 6, a concave guide groove 330 is formed on the left side of the guide portion 324L, and the guide groove 330 is vertical extending in the vertical direction (substantially parallel to the guide shafts 306L and 306R). The portion 327, the curved portion 328 extending diagonally upward (upward on the back side when viewed from the front side) while bending backward from the upper end of the vertical portion 327, and the curved portion 328 bent from the rear end of the curved portion 328 in the rearward downward direction (curved). It has the shape of a bent portion 329 extending diagonally downward with respect to the portion 328. Since the guide unit 324L and the guide unit 324R have the same configuration, only the guide unit 324L will be described here, and the description of the guide unit 324R will be omitted. Furthermore, in FIG. 6, the configuration of the cover member 307R is omitted for convenience of explanation.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the movable body 302 is composed of a first movable portion 302A and a second movable portion 302B connected to the first movable portion 302A. The first movable portion 302A is an arm 309L arranged on the left and right sides of the first decorative member 322 and the first decorative member 322 and supporting the first movable portion 302A so as to be movable in the vertical direction with respect to the guide shafts 306L and 306R. , 309R, and so on. Through holes 331L and 331R penetrating in the vertical direction are formed in the arms 309L and 309R (see FIG. 9B), and guide shafts 306L and 306R are inserted into the through holes 331L and 331R. The inner diameters of the through holes 331L and 331R are larger than the outer diameters of the guide shafts 306L and 306R. A part of the rear surface side of the arms 309L and 309R is lightened in a honeycomb shape, whereby the strength of the arms 309L and 309R is maintained and the weight is reduced.

Further, the above-mentioned regulation pieces 317L and 317R are projected from the front surface of the arms 309L and 309R, and the regulation pieces 317L and 317R are inserted into the recessed grooves 312L and 312R, respectively (FIGS. 8 and 8). 9 (B)). As a result, when the left and right guide shafts 306L and 306R rotate, the arms 309L and 309R are restricted from rotating around the guide shafts 306L and 306R, and the guide shafts 306L and 306R rotate. It is possible to prevent the first movable portion 302A from slightly moving or twisting to make it difficult to rise. That is, the first movable portion 302A maintains a posture (a state visible to the player) while the movable body 302 moves between the first position and the second position.

Although not shown, the difference dimension obtained by subtracting the plate thickness in the left-right direction of the regulation pieces 317L and 317R from the width dimension in the left-right direction in the recessed grooves 312L and 312R is the inner diameter of the through holes 331L and 331R in the arms 309L and 309R and the guide. It is set smaller than the difference dimension from the outer diameter of the shafts 306L and 306R. In other words, the play dimension between the concave grooves 312L and 312R and the regulation pieces 317L and 317R in the left-right direction is set smaller than the play dimension between the through holes 331L and 331R and the guide shafts 306L and 306R.

By doing so, when the arms 309L and 309R are moved and guided up and down by the guide shafts 306L and 306R, the through holes 331L in the arms 309L and 309R are formed in the groove portions 321 formed on the outer periphery of the guide shafts 306L and 306R. The rotation of the arms 309L and 309R can be regulated while preventing the opening edge of the 331R from being caught (difficult to bite) and hindering the vertical movement of the first movable portion 302A.

Further, the first decorative member 322 is mainly composed of a non-translucent member, a part of which is composed of a translucent portion 322a, and an LED provided with a plurality of production LEDs on the back surface thereof. A substrate (not shown) is attached. As a result, the light from the effect LED can be emitted forward through the translucent portion 322a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the second movable portion 302B includes a second decorative member 323, first arm portions 325L and 325R arranged on the left and right sides of one end side of the second decorative member 323, and the first. It is mainly composed of second arm portions 326L and 326R arranged on the left and right sides of the other end side of the two decorative members 323.

The first arm portions 325L and 325R movably support the second movable portion 302B with respect to the guide portions 324L and 324R in the second guide means 319. Specifically, guide rollers 340L and 340R are provided at the tips of the first arm portions 325L and 325R, and the guide rollers 340L and 340R are inserted into the guide grooves 330 and 330 in the second guide means 319. It can be moved along the guide grooves 330 and 330.

Further, the second arm portions 326L and 326R are rotatably supported by the first movable portion 302A, whereby the first movable portion 302A and the second movable portion 302B are bent. (The state of FIG. 6A) and the stretching operation of stretching (the state of FIG. 6B) can be performed. In other words, the second movable portion 302B is in the first state in which the movable body 302 is tilted to the back side with respect to the first movable portion 302A in the state where the movable body 302 is in the first position, and the movable body 302 is in the second position. In the second state, the first movable portion 302A is juxtaposed with the first movable portion 302A.

Further, the first decorative member 322 of the first movable portion 302A is formed larger than the second decorative member 323 of the second movable portion 302B in the front view. Further, the weight of the first movable portion 302A is larger than the weight of the second movable portion 302B.

Further, the second decorative member 323 is mainly composed of a non-translucent member, a part of which is composed of a translucent portion 323a, and an LED provided with a plurality of directing LEDs on the back surface thereof. A substrate (not shown) is attached. As a result, the light from the effect LED can be emitted forward through the translucent portion 323a (see FIGS. 3B and 4).

As shown in FIGS. 7, 8 (B) and 9, the guide shafts 306L and 306R have drive bodies 310L and 310R for moving the first movable portion 302A and the second movable portion 302B upward in the vertical direction. It is provided so that it can be moved.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, through holes 332L and 332R penetrating in the vertical direction are formed in the drive bodies 310L and 310R forming a substantially rectangular parallelepiped, and the guide shafts 306L and 332R are formed in the through holes 332L and 332R. 306R is inserted. The through holes 332L and 332R are provided slightly larger than the outer diameters of the guide shafts 306L and 306R, and the engaging portion 333 is projected on the inner peripheral surface of the through holes 332L and 332R. The engaging portion 333 is fitted in the groove portion 321 of the guide shafts 306L and 306R. As shown in FIG. 9B, since the vertical width L3 of the engaging portion 333 is formed to be smaller than the vertical width L4 of the groove portion 321 when the engaging portion 333 is fitted in the groove portion 321. Is formed with a gap (play) in the vertical direction. Since the through holes 332L and 332R are provided to be larger than the outer diameters of the guide shafts 306L and 306R, the drive bodies 310L and 310R can be slightly inclined with respect to the guide shafts 306L and 306R. There is.

Further, as described above, since the regulation pieces 311L and 311R of the drive bodies 310L and 310R are inserted into the recessed grooves 312L and 312R, when the left and right guide shafts 306L and 306R rotate, the drive bodies 310L and 310R Is restricted from rotating around the guide shafts 306L and 306R.

Since the engaging portion 333 is fitted in the groove portion 321 of the guide shafts 306L and 306R, the drive bodies 310L and 310R rise when the guide shafts 306L and 306R rotate in the first direction, and the guide shafts 306L and 306R Is rotated in the second direction opposite to the first direction, the drive bodies 310L and 310R are lowered (see FIG. 12). Further, since the engaging portion 333 is fitted in the groove portion 321 of the guide shafts 306L and 306R with play, there is little friction between the engaging portion 333 and the groove portion 321 when the guide shafts 306L and 306R are rotated. , The drive bodies 310L and 310R are easy to move up and down.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, first elastic members 334L and 334R are provided on the upper portions of the drive bodies 310L and 310R. Further, second elastic members 335L and 335R are provided on the upper portions of the lower parts 336L and 336R of the cover members 307L and 307R.

The first elastic members 334L and 334R and the second elastic members 335L and 335R of this embodiment are made of synthetic resin, and the second elastic members 335L and 335R are more deformed than the first elastic members 334L and 334R. It is composed of a synthetic resin that is difficult to do. Specifically, the first elastic members 334L and 334R are synthetic resins made of a rubber material having the property of converting impact into heat energy and extinguishing it, and the second elastic members 335L and 335R convert impact into wave motion and absorb it. It is a synthetic resin made of a gel-like silicone material, and the second elastic members 335L and 335R have a higher impact absorption rate than the first elastic members 334L and 334R.

Next, the movement modes of the first movable portion 302A and the second movable portion 302B will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 14. 10A and 10B are explanatory views showing the state of the movable body at the first position, FIG. 10B is an explanatory view showing the state of the movable body at the third position, and FIG. 10C is at the second position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a movable body. 11A and 11B are explanatory views showing the state of the movable body and the state of the effect solenoid when the movable body is in the first position, and FIG. 11B is an explanatory view of the movable body that has fallen from the state of (A) to the second position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state and the state of the production solenoid. 12A and 12B are explanatory views showing the initial state of the movable body and the state of the effect solenoid in the operation of returning from the second position to the first position, and FIG. 12B is the operation of returning from the second position to the first position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the movable body and the state of the production solenoid in the latter stage. FIG. 13 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the second movable portion moves from a state in which it faces substantially horizontal to a second position. 14A and 14B are explanatory views showing a state in which the impact caused by the fall of the movable body is not transmitted to the first elastic member at the second position, and FIG. 14B shows the impact caused by the fall of the movable body (A). 1 It is explanatory drawing which shows the state transmitted to the elastic member.

As shown in FIGS. 10 (A) and 11 (A), in the initial state of driving, the movable body 302 is held at the first position by locking the first movable portion 302A by the effect solenoids 318L and 318R. Has been done. At this time, the first arm portions 325L and 325R of the second movable portion 302B are inserted into the bent portions 329 of the guide grooves 330 and 330 in the second guide means 319, respectively, whereby the second movable portion 302B is inserted into the second movable portion 302B. The first arm portion 325L, 325R side falls to the lower side on the back side of the second arm portion 326L, 326R side, and is tilted so as to form an acute angle with respect to the first movable portion 302A (first state, FIG. 6 (1st state, FIG. 6). See A)). Specifically, the internal angle formed by the first movable portion 302A and the second movable portion 302B is an acute angle. Further, the drive bodies 310L and 310R are arranged at drive standby positions mounted on the second elastic members 335L and 335R fixed to the upper parts of the lower parts 336L and 336R of the cover members 307L and 307R.

As described above, since the first decorative member 322 of the first movable portion 302A is formed larger than the second decorative member 323 of the second movable portion 302B in the front view, the movable body 302 is in the first position. Occasionally, the first decorative member 322 of the first movable portion 302A covers the second decorative member 323 of the second movable portion 302B, and the second decorative member 323 of the second movable portion 302B becomes invisible from the front side. Further, since the second movable portion 302B is tilted so as to form an acute angle with respect to the first movable portion 302A, the second movable portion 302B is extremely difficult for the player to see when the movable body 302 is in the first position. Therefore, only the first movable portion 302A can be visually recognized by the player.

At this time, the upper position detection switches 315L and 315R provided in the recessed grooves 312L and 312R detect the regulation pieces 317L and 317R of the arms 309L and 309R, and the lower position detection switches 313L and 313R drive. The detection pieces 316L and 316R of the bodies 310L and 310R are detected. By the detection signals from the upper position detection switches 315L and 315R and the lower position detection switches 313L and 313R, the effect control CPU 120 holds the movable body 302 in the first position and the drive bodies 310L and 310R in the drive standby position. It is determined that it is located in.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the effect solenoids 318L and 318R based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the fall timing is reached during the execution of the movable body effect). As a result, the locking member 318a is retracted to the front side, and the locked state between the first movable portion 302A and the locking member 318a is released (see the right figure of FIG. 11B). When the locked state between the first movable portion 302A and the locking member 318a is released in this way, the first movable portion 302A first falls due to its own weight.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10B and 13, when the first movable portion 302A falls, the second arm portions 326L and 326R are pulled, and the second movable portion 302B is the first arm portion 325L and 325R. The guide rollers 340L and 340R of the above are rotated so as to be tilted forward. When the second movable portion 302B faces in a substantially horizontal direction, the second movable portion 302B is almost covered with the first movable portion 302A, and the second movable portion 302B is difficult to see from the front side.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13, when the first movable portion 302A falls further downward, the second arm portions 326L and 326R of the second movable portion 302B are pulled further downward, and the second movable portion 302B The guide rollers 340L and 340R of the first arm portions 325L and 325R ride on the bent portion 329. That is, in the second movable portion 302B, the second arm portions 326L and 326R move vertically downward, and the first arm portions 325L and 325R move diagonally forward, so that the second movable portion 302B is on the player side. Appears suddenly (becomes visible) while approaching. When the movable body 302 falls, the effect solenoid 318L is turned off after a predetermined time, and the locking member 318a protrudes toward the guide shaft 306L.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 10 (C) and 11 (B), the first arm portions 325L and 325R of the second movable portion 302B are guided by the curved portion 328 and the vertical portion 327 together with the first movable portion 302A ( Fall together). Specifically, the movable body 302 moves to the second position in a state where the first decorative member 322 of the first movable portion 302A and the second decorative member 323 of the second movable portion 302B are arranged vertically.

When the first decorative member 322 of the first movable portion 302A and the second decorative member 323 of the second movable portion 302B are vertically arranged side by side, the second decorative member 323 of the second movable portion 302B The end edge of the 1 movable portion 302A on the first decorative member 322 side is arranged on the rear side of the edge of the second decorative member 323 of the second movable portion 302B in the first decorative member 322 of the first movable portion 302A. It overlaps slightly in the front-back direction. When the movable body 302 is in the second position (during the stretching operation), the third decorative member 320 attached to the second guide means 319 is the first decoration of the first movable portion 302A when viewed from the front side. It is connected to the second decorative member 323 of the member 322 and the second movable portion 302B, and one decorative portion can be formed by the first decorative member 322, the second decorative member 323, and the third decorative member 320.

Further, as described above, since the weight of the first movable portion 302A is larger than the weight of the second movable portion 302B, the effect solenoids 318L and 318R for holding the movable body 302 in the first position are retracted. When the first movable portion 302A is dropped, the weight of the first movable portion 302A allows the second movable portion 302B to follow and drop, so that the movable body 302 can be smoothly dropped.

As shown in FIG. 14, when the movable body 302 falls to the second position, the driving bodies 310L and 310R restrict the movement of the movable body 302 to the opposite side (lower side) from the first position, and also The lower parts 336L and 336R of the cover members 307L and 307R restrict the movement of the drive bodies 310L and 310R to the opposite side (lower side) of the movable body 302 from the first position.

Specifically, first, the arms 309L and 309R of the first movable portion 302A collide with the first elastic members 334L and 334R provided above the driving bodies 310L and 310R, whereby the movable body 302 moves downward. Be regulated. The first elastic members 334L and 334R alleviate the impact generated between the movable body 302 and the driving bodies 310L and 310R when the movable body 302 falls. At this time, the arms 309L and 309R of the first movable portion 302A do not come into direct contact with the driving bodies 310L and 310R.

Further, the impact generated when the movable body 302 falls to the second position is transmitted to the drive bodies 310L and 310R while being relaxed by the first elastic members 334L and 334R. As described above, since the engaging portions 333 of the drive bodies 310L and 310R are fitted into the groove portions 321 of the guide shafts 306L and 306R with play in the vertical direction, the movable body 302 is in the second position. When the impact of the fall is transmitted to the drive bodies 310L and 310R, the drive bodies 310L and 310R move downward. At this time, the downward movement of the drive bodies 310L and 310R is restricted by the lower parts 336L and 336R of the cover members 307L and 307R via the second elastic members 335L and 335R arranged below the drive bodies 310L and 310R. That is, the second elastic members 335L and 335R are designed to alleviate the impact generated between the driving bodies 310L and 310R and the lower parts 336L and 336R of the cover members 307L and 307R when the movable body 302 is dropped. At this time, the drive bodies 310L and 310R do not directly abut on the lower parts 336L and 336R of the cover members 307L and 307R.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (B), when the movable body 302 falls to the second position, the movable body 302 (arms 309L, 309R) shown in FIG. 14 (A) is the first elastic member 334L, 334R. The upper surface of the second elastic members 335L and 335R is lower by the dimension L1 than the state in which the movable body 302 is in contact with the upper surface (the impact caused by the fall of the movable body 302 is not transmitted to the first elastic members 334L and 334R). At the same time, the upper surfaces of the first elastic members 334L and 334R are lowered by the dimension L2. The dimension L1 is the amount of deformation of the second elastic members 335L and 335R, and the dimension L2 is the sum of the amount of deformation of the second elastic members 335L and 335R and the amount of deformation of the first elastic members 334L and 334R.

As described above, since the second elastic members 335L and 335R are made of a synthetic resin that is more difficult to deform than the first elastic members 334L and 334R, the amount of deformation (L1) of the second elastic members 335L and 335R is , It is smaller than the deformation amount (L2-L1) of the first elastic members 334L and 334R. Therefore, when the drive bodies 310L and 310R are slightly tilted with respect to the guide shafts 306L and 306R, the first elastic member 334L, between the drive bodies 310L and 310R and the lower parts 336L and 336R of the cover members 307L and 307R, The inclination of the drive bodies 310L and 310R can be made smaller than that of using the 334R. Therefore, it is possible to effectively reduce the load applied to the engaging portions 333 of the driving bodies 310L and 310R and the groove portions 321 of the guide shafts 306L and 306R due to the inclination of the driving bodies 310L and 310R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12A, when the movable body 302 is returned to the first position, the effect control CPU 120 drives the guide shafts 306L and 306R by rotating the guide shafts 306L and 306R in the first direction by the effect motors 308L and 308R. Raise the bodies 310L and 310R. As a result, the first movable portion 302A and the second movable portion 302B mounted on the upper parts of the drive bodies 310L and 310R move upward.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12B, the arms 309L and 309R of the first movable portion 302A push the locking member 318a forward and move upward. When the arms 309L and 309R move above the locking member 318a, the locking member 318a protrudes rearward due to the urging force of a compression spring (not shown), and the arms 309L and 309R are locked to the locking member 318a. The movable body 302 is held in the first position. When the movable body 302 is held in the first position, the regulation pieces 317L and 317R of the arms 309L and 309R are detected by the upper position detection switches 315L and 315R, and the effect control CPU 120 detects the upper position of the regulation pieces 317L and 317R. Based on the detection by the switches 315L and 315R, assuming that the movable body 302 is held in the first position, the rotation of the effect motors 308L and 308R in the first direction is stopped and the movable body 302 is rotated in the reverse direction in the second direction. The drive bodies 310L and 310R are moved downward. After that, based on the fact that the detection pieces 316L and 316R of the drive bodies 310L and 310R were detected by the lower position detection switches 313L and 313R, assuming that the drive bodies 310L and 310R returned to the drive standby position, the effect motors 308L and 308R were moved. The rotation of the guide shafts 306L and 306R is stopped in the off state.

Although not shown, intermediate position detection switches 314L and 314R are provided at intermediate positions of the recessed grooves 312L and 312R, and the regulation pieces 311L and 311R of the drive bodies 310L and 310R can be detected. The CPU 120 can stop the drive bodies 310L and 310R at the intermediate positions of the recessed grooves 312L and 312R based on the detection of the regulation pieces 311L and 311R by the intermediate position detection switches 314L and 314R. According to this, for example, when the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the decorative pattern, the movable body 302 is dropped to the third position between the first position and the second position as a warning effect and stopped. The movable body 302 can improve the effectability.

When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the movable body effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines either an effect pattern for dropping the movable body 302 to the second position or an effect pattern for dropping the movable body 302 to the third position, and determines the effect pattern. The movable body effect may be executed based on the above. Specifically, when the movable body effect of dropping the movable body 302 is performed as a notice effect when the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed on the image display device 5, the variable display result is displayed as a big hit. When the result is obtained, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern for dropping the movable body 302 to the second position at a higher rate than the effect pattern for dropping the movable body 302 to the second position, and the movable body 302 is in the second position. It is also possible to increase the expectation of a big hit when the ball falls to. In this way, by making the jackpot expectation different depending on the drop position of the movable body 302, it is possible to pay attention to the drop position of the movable body 302.

Further, even when the movable body 302 is dropped to the third position and stopped, the impact applied to the drive bodies 310L and 310R when the movable body 302 is dropped can be alleviated by the first elastic members 334L and 334R. Although the third position in this embodiment is set to a position in which the second movable portion 302B faces in a substantially horizontal direction (see FIG. 10B) when the movable body 302 is dropped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the position may be appropriately set so that the effect can be effectively produced. Further, a plurality of stop positions of the movable body may be set.

Further, when the movable body effect in which the first movable portion 302A and the second movable portion 302B fall in this way is performed as a notice effect, for example, when the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the decorative pattern. Before the first movable portion 302A and the second movable portion 302B fall, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are reduced and displayed at the lower right of the display screen, and the first movable portion 302A and the first movable portion 302A and the first movable portion 302A are displayed. 2 An effect image suggesting the fall of the movable portion 302B is displayed. It should be noted that such display contents can be variously changed according to the type of effect and the like.

In addition, as the execution timing of the movable body effect in which the movable body 302 falls, it can be executed at a plurality of execution timings such as a notice during change, a pseudo continuous effect, development to super reach, a big hit confirmation effect, a promotion effect to probability fluctuation, and the like. Is. Further, various effect controls such as a drop position, a light emitting mode of the effect LED 9, and an output mode of the effect sound effect may be different for each of the plurality of execution timings.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the effect solenoids 318L and 318R and retracts the locking member 308 to the rear side based on the fact that the predetermined conditions are satisfied as described above, and releases the locked state. The 1 movable part 302A and the 2nd movable part 302B were dropped, but when the 1st movable part 302A and the 2nd movable part 302B were dropped, the detection pieces 316L and 316R were used by the lower position detection switches 313L and 313R. Is detected, and on the condition that the detection pieces 316L and 316R are detected by the lower position detection switches 313L and 313R, that is, the drive bodies 310L and 310R are in the drive standby position. The first movable portion 302A and the second movable portion 302B may be dropped.

By doing so, the first movable portion 302A and the second movable portion 302B are dropped even though the drive bodies 310L and 310R are not located in the drive standby position due to some factor (for example, being caught). It is possible to prevent the movable body 302 from being hindered from falling before reaching the second stop position by the drive bodies 310L and 310R above the drive standby position.

When the drive bodies 310L and 310R are not arranged at the drive standby position when the first movable portion 302A and the second movable portion 302B are dropped, the effect control CPU 120 has the first movable portion 302A and the second movable portion 302A. An alternative effect of the effect of dropping the 302B (for example, the image display device 5 may display an image in which the first movable portion 302A and the second movable portion 302B are dropped) may be executed.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the movable body effect of dropping the first movable unit 302A and the second movable unit 302B, it determines whether or not the drive bodies 310L and 310R are arranged in the drive standby position. You should check before the fall timing. Alternatively, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the drive bodies 310L and 310R are arranged at the drive standby position when determining whether or not to execute the movable body effect or when the variable display of the symbol is started. If it is confirmed and it is not arranged in the drive standby position, the execution of the movable body effect may not be decided or the execution may be invalidated.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is driven by the downward position detection switches 313L and 313R within the period from when the drive bodies 310L and 310R raise the first movable portion 302A and the second movable portion 302B to when they return to the drive standby position. If 310L, 310R cannot be detected, the effect motors 308L, 308R are driven (retried) again, and if the driving bodies 310L, 310R cannot be detected by the lower position detection switches 313L, 313R within a predetermined period, The alternative effect as described above may be executed.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 as the embodiment of the present invention, the movable body 302 that can move between the first position and the second position different from the first position, and the movable body When the 302 moves from the first position to the second position, the moving bodies 310L and 310R restrict the movement of the movable body 302 to the side opposite to the first position, and the driving bodies 310L and 310R move the movable body 302 first. The lower parts 336L and 336R of the cover members 307L and 307R that restrict the movement of the movable body 302 to the opposite side to the first position when regulated at two positions via the driving bodies 310L and 310R, and the movable body 302 and the driving The first elastic members 334L and 334R that alleviate the impact generated between the bodies 310L and 310R, and the second elastic members that alleviate the impact generated between the driving bodies 310L and 310R and the lower parts 336L and 336R of the cover members 307L and 307R. The members 335L and 335R are provided.

By doing so, the movable body 302 can be suitably regulated by the two regulating portions at the second position, and the impact generated by the regulation can be controlled by the driving bodies 310L and 310R and the lower parts 336L and 336R of the cover members 307L and 307R. Since the first elastic members 334L and 334R and the second elastic members 335L and 335R can disperse and alleviate the load at two locations, it is possible to prevent the load due to the impact from being concentrated on the movable body 302 or one regulation portion and being damaged. can do.

More specifically, since the downward movement of the movable body 302 is regulated by the drive bodies 310L and 310R and the lower parts 336L and 336R of the cover members 307L and 307R, the impact generated during the regulation is covered by the drive bodies 310L and 310R. It can be dispersed by relative movement with the members 307L and 307R. In addition, first elastic members 334L and 334R are provided between the movable body 302 and the driving bodies 310L and 310R, and between the driving bodies 310L and 310R and the lower parts 336L and 336R of the cover members 307L and 307R. Since the second elastic members 335L and 335R are provided, the impact between adjacent members can be alleviated.

Further, the movable body 302 and the drive bodies 310L and 310R do not come into direct contact with each other by the first elastic members 334L and 334R, and the drive bodies 310L and 310R and the lower parts 336L and 336R of the cover members 307L and 307R are second. The elastic members 335L and 335R do not come into direct contact with each other. Therefore, the load applied to the movable body 302, the driving bodies 310L, 310R, and the lower parts 336L, 336R of the cover members 307L, 307R can be reduced as much as possible.

Further, the drive bodies 310L and 310R are provided so as to be movable, and the movable body 302 is driven so as to be moved from the second position to the first position by the effect motors 308L and 308R. Can be combined with one member, so the number of parts can be reduced.

Further, since the second position is provided below the first position and the movable body 302 can fall from the first position to the second position by its own weight, the impact of the fall of the movable body 302 can be received by the driving body 310L, The 310R, the lower parts 336L, 336R of the cover members 307L, 307R, the first elastic members 334L, 334R, and the second elastic members 335L, 335R can be appropriately relaxed, and the movable body 302 can be moved from the first position to the second position. Since it falls suddenly, it can give an impact to the player and improve the effect.

Further, the second regulating portion is provided on the lower parts 336L and 336R of the cover members 307L and 307R that support the movable body 302, and the impact generated by the regulation is applied to the lower part 336L of the cover members 307L and 307R that support the movable body 302. , 336R can be transmitted and dispersed, so that the downward movement of the movable body 302 can be stably regulated at the second position.

Further, since the second elastic members 335L and 335R in this embodiment are made of a synthetic resin that is less likely to be deformed than the first elastic members 334L and 334R, for example, the drive bodies 310L and 310R are the guide shafts 306L and 306R. When the drive body 310L, 310R is slightly tilted, the drive bodies 310L, 310R are tilted more than the first elastic members 334L, 334R are used between the drive bodies 310L, 310R and the lower parts 336L, 336R of the cover members 307L, 307R. It can be made smaller, and the load applied to the engaging portions 333 of the driving bodies 310L and 310R and the groove portions 321 of the guide shafts 306L and 306R can be effectively reduced by the inclination of the driving bodies 310L and 310R.

Further, the movable body 302 is composed of a first movable portion 302A and a second movable portion 302B, and the first movable portion 302A and the second movable portion 302B can rotate with each other and the first movable portion 302B. The arms 309L and 309R of the 302A are attached with play to the guide shafts 306L and 306R, and the guide rollers 340L and 340R of the second movable portion 302B have some play and the guide grooves 330 and 330. When the movable body 302 falls to the second position, the first movable portion 302A and the second movable portion 302B rotate within the range of the play to release the impact. can.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to move between the first position and a second position different from the first position, and the first movable portion 302A and the first movable portion 302A. Separately from the movable body 302 having the second movable portion 302B that can be tilted with respect to the movable portion 302A, the first guide means 303L and 303R for moving and guiding the first movable portion 302A, and the first guide means 303L and 303R. The second guide means 319 provided to move and guide the second movable portion 302B is provided, and the second guide means 319 is provided from the vertical portion 327 substantially parallel to the first guide means 303L and 303R and the vertical portion 327. The first movable portion 302A has a second guide portion (curved portion 328 and bent portion 329) extending to the back side, and the movable body 302 moves between the first position and the second position. During that time, the state visible to the player is maintained, and the second movable portion 302B is guided by the curved portion 328 and the bent portion 329 in a state where the movable body 302 is in the first position, so that the first movable portion 302A In the first state in which the movable body 302 is tilted to the back side, the movable body 302 is in the second position, and is guided by the vertical portion 327 to be in the second state in parallel with the first movable portion 302A.

That is, in the first state (bending operation), the second movable portion 302B is tilted to the back side with respect to the first movable portion 302A, so that it becomes difficult or invisible to the player, and the second state (extending operation). By being arranged side by side with the first movable portion 302A, the player can see the movable portion 302A. That is, when the movable body 302 moves between the first position and the second position, the first movable portion 302A maintains a state of being visible to the player, whereas the second movable portion 302B is the first. Since the state changes between a state (a state that is difficult or invisible to the player) and a second state (a state that is visible to the player), it is possible to give the player unexpectedness.

Further, the first movable portion 302A and the second movable portion 302B are moved and guided by separate guide members (first guide means 303L, 303R, second guide means 319), thereby affecting the first movable portion 302A. The second movable portion 302B can be tilted without any need.

Specifically, the first movable portion 302A has through holes 331L and 331R of its arms 309L and 309R and regulation pieces 317L and 317R, and guide shafts 306L and 306R and recessed grooves 312L of the first guide means 303L and 303R. With 312R, it is guided to move in the vertical direction between the first position and the second position. On the other hand, in the second movable portion 302B, the guide rollers 340L and 340R of the first arm portions 325L and 325R move in the vertical direction by the vertical portions 327 of the guide grooves 330 and 330 in the second guide means 319, and the curved portion 328 and the curved portion 328 The bent portion 329 guides the user so as to tilt to the back side. That is, since the first movable portion 302A is moved and guided only in the vertical direction by the first guide means 303L and 303R, the second movable portion 302B is tilted to the back side by the curved portion 328 and the bent portion 329. Even if guided, the first movable portion 302A can maintain a posture visible to the player only by moving in the vertical direction.

Further, when the first movable portion 302A and the second movable portion 302B are guided by one guide member, a relative twist or the like occurs during the movement between the first movable portion 302A and the second movable portion 302B. Then, a part of the first movable portion 302A or the second movable portion 302B may interfere with the guide member, causing a malfunction such as being unable to move any more.

On the other hand, when the first movable portion 302A and the second movable portion 302B are moved and guided by the separate first guide means 303L and 303R and the second guide means 319 as in the present embodiment, the first movable portion 302A and the second movable portion 302B are moved and guided. Even if a relative twist or the like occurs during the movement of the 302A and the second movable portion 302B, the first guide means 303L, 303R and the second guide means 319 are relatively easy to move with each other, and the first Twisting of the movable portion 302A and the second movable portion 302B can be eliminated, and malfunction can be prevented. Further, since the lower end portion on the front side of the second guide means 319 is in a free state (a state in which the second guide means 319 is not fixed to the base portion 301 or the like), it becomes easier to move relative to the first guide means 303L and 303R. ing.

Further, since the first guide means 303L and 303R and the second guide means 319 are separately provided, the second guide means 319 is not affected by the movement of the first movable portion 302A or is unlikely to be affected. You can freely design the location in advance. In other words, the position of the second guide means 319 is not limited to the position on the extension line of the first guide means 303L and 303R.

Further, since the second movable portion 302B is housed in the back side by the curved portion 328 and the bent portion 329 at the first position, space saving in the vertical direction can be achieved.

Further, since the first guide means 303L, 303R and the second guide means 319 are separate, the installation location and size (length, etc.) of the first guide means 303L, 303R and the second guide means 319, etc. Can be freely set, so that the space for installing the first guide means 303L, 303R and the second guide means 319 can be reduced.

Further, since the second movable portion 302B tilts to the rear side so as to form an acute angle with respect to the first movable portion 302A in the first state, it can be made more difficult for the player to see in the first state. Specifically, in the first state, the internal angle formed by the first movable portion 302A and the second movable portion 302B is an acute angle, and the second movable portion 302B is perpendicular or obtuse to the first movable portion 302A facing in a substantially vertical direction. Since the range of the second movable portion 302B when viewed from the vertical direction is narrower than that in the case of forming the above, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see.

The second guide portion has a curved portion 328 that inclines upward from the vertical portion 327 toward the back side and a bent portion 329 that inclines downward from the vertical portion 327 toward the back side. When the movable body 302 moves toward the first position, the second movable portion 302B can be smoothly tilted with respect to the first movable portion 302A, and the bent portion 329 allows the second movable portion 302A to be second with respect to the first movable portion 302A. The movable portion 302B can be tilted so as to form an acute angle.

In other words, by falling into the bent portion 329, the second movable portion 302B tilts at an acute angle with respect to the first movable portion 302A. Therefore, when the movable body 302 is in the first position, the bending portion 329 restricts the movement of the second movable portion 302B to the front side, so that the effect solenoids 318L and 318R that are locked to the first movable portion 302A The applied load can be reduced.

Further, when the movable body 302 moves toward the second position, it is difficult to see the second movable portion 302B from the front side until the second movable portion 302B faces substantially horizontal. 2 The second arm portions 326L and 326R sides of the movable portion 302B are moved and guided in the vertical direction by the vertical portion 327, and the first arm portions 325L and 325R sides are moved and guided diagonally forward by the bending portion 329. The falling speed of the movable portion 302A slows down for a moment, and the second movable portion 302B suddenly appears while approaching the player side, so that the operation of the movable body 302 can be changed.

Further, since the vertical portion 327 is provided substantially parallel to the guide shafts 306L and 306R, the first arm portion 325L and 325R side approaches the vertical portion 327 when the movable body 302 moves toward the second position. Since the second movable portion 302B is guided so as to be substantially parallel to the first movable portion 302A, the sense of unity of both the first movable portion 302A and the second movable portion 302B can be improved.

Further, the second guide means 319 has a pair of guide portions 324L and 324R for guiding the left and right sides of the second movable portion 302B, and a connecting plate member 341 for connecting each of the pair of guide portions 324L and 324R. The connecting plate member 341 is provided with a third decorative member 320 that forms a part of the decorative portion of the movable body 302 when the movable body 302 moves to the second position. That is, when the movable body 302 is in the second position, the third decorative member 320 attached to the second guide means 319 is the first decorative member 322 and the second movable portion of the first movable portion 302A when viewed from the front side. It is connected to the second decorative member 323 of 302B, and one decorative portion can be formed by the first decorative member 322, the second decorative member 323, and the third decorative member 320. In other words, the movable body 302 can be decorated by using a part of the second guiding means 319. In this embodiment, the third decorative member 320 is provided as a part of the second guide means 319, and when the movable body 302 is in the second position, the first decorative member 322, the second decorative member 323, and the third decorative member 320 are provided. The form in which the decorative members 320 are connected to form one decorative portion has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the entire second guide means is decorated and the movable body 302 is in the second position. In addition, the entire second guiding means may be connected to the first decorative member 322 and the second decorative member 323 to form one decorative portion.

Further, when the first decorative member 322 of the first movable portion 302A and the second decorative member 323 of the second movable portion 302B are arranged vertically, the second decorative member 323 of the second movable portion 302B is further arranged. The edge of the first movable portion 302A on the first decorative member 322 side is arranged on the rear side of the edge of the second decorative member 323 of the second movable portion 302B in the first decorative member 322 of the first movable portion 302A. And slightly overlapped in the front-back direction. Therefore, when the movable body 302 is in the second position, the joint portion between the first decorative member 322 of the first movable portion 302A and the second decorative member 323 of the second movable portion 302B is difficult to see from the front side and is aesthetically pleasing. Is improved.

Further, since the strength of the pair of guide portions 324L and 324R is reinforced by being connected by the connecting plate member 341, the size of the guide portions 324L and 324R can be reduced and the guide portions 324L and 324R can be directed toward the second position of the movable body 302. Twisting of the guide portions 324L and 324R is unlikely to occur during the movement.

Further, since the connecting plate member 341 is formed of a translucent member having translucency, it can be emitted to the translucent portion 320a side of the third decorative member 320 via the connecting plate member 341. That is, it is not necessary to provide an LED substrate or the like on which the effect LED is provided on the back surface of the third decorative member 320.

Further, since the movable body 302 falls from the first position to the second position by its own weight, the movable body 302 can be made to appear from the first position to the second position as quickly as possible, which can give an impact to the player. ..

Further, when the movable body 302 is moved toward the first position, the driving bodies 310L and 310R cause the arms 309L and 309R of the first movable portion 302A to be off, and the locking members 318a of the effect solenoids 318L and 318L are turned off. Is pushed forward to move upward, and is locked to the locking member 318a protruding rearward again by the urging force of a compression spring (not shown), so that the movable body 302 is held in the first position. Control can be simplified.

Further, the first guide means 303L, 303R is a moving means for moving the drive bodies 310L, 310R (for example, effect motors 308L, 308R, drive gear 338, driven gear 339, guide shafts 306L, 306R, groove portion 321). By providing the recessed grooves 312L and 312R provided separately, the movement of the first movable portion 302A from the second position to the first position is stable.

Further, since the restricting pieces 311L, 311R of the drive bodies 310L and 310R and the restricting pieces 317L and 317R of the first movable portion 302A are guided by the concave grooves 312L and 312R, the restricting pieces 311L and 311R and the restricting pieces 317L and 317R are guided. The upper position detection switches 315L and 315R and the intermediate position detection switches 314L and 314R reliably detect the detection pieces 316L and 316R of the drive bodies 310L and 310R, and the lower position detection switches 313L and 313R reliably detect the detection pieces 316L and 316R. ..

In the above embodiment, the first elastic members 334L and 334R are fixed to the drive bodies 310L and 310R, and the second elastic members 335L and 335R are fixed to the lower parts 336L and 336R of the cover members 307L and 307R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, the first impact mitigation means is provided between the moving body and the first regulation unit, and the second impact mitigation means is the first regulation unit and the second regulation unit. It suffices if it is provided between the parts.

Specifically, the first impact mitigating means may be fixed to either the moving body and the first regulating portion as long as it is provided between the moving body and the first regulating portion, or the moving body. It may not be fixed to either the mobile body and the first regulation unit, but may be simply provided between the moving body and the first regulation unit in a free state. Similarly, the second impact mitigation means may be fixed to either the first regulation unit or the second regulation unit as long as it is provided between the first regulation unit and the second regulation unit. It is not fixed to either the first regulation part and the second regulation part, and may be simply provided between the first regulation part and the second regulation part in a free state.

In the above embodiment, the first elastic members 334L and 334R and the second elastic members 335L and 335R are made of synthetic resins having different characteristics such as elasticity, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , The first impact mitigation means and the second impact mitigation means may be made of a synthetic resin having the same characteristics. Further, the first impact mitigation means, which is easily subjected to a large impact, is composed of an inexpensive elastic member, and the second impact mitigation means, which is less likely to be impacted than the first impact mitigation means, is made of an elastic member which is more expensive than the first impact mitigation means. The first elastic members 334L and 334R and the second elastic members 335L and 335R may be composed of members having different manufacturing costs. That is, the first impact mitigation means and the second impact mitigation means may be composed of members having different characteristics, shapes, sizes, materials, etc., or may be composed of the same members. Furthermore, the first impact mitigation means and the second impact mitigation means are made of synthetic resin, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any material that can alleviate the impact may be used, for example, a spring or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the drive bodies 310L and 310R, which are movable up and down by a drive source and for raising the moving body, are used as the first regulation unit has been illustrated, but the present invention is limited thereto. The first regulation unit may be a member that can be moved (including vibration) by the impact of the falling of the moving body, or a member that can be moved up and down to change the falling position of the moving body. It may be. That is, the first regulation unit may be a member that can regulate the movement of the moving body to the second position and can move relative to the second regulation unit.

In the above embodiment, the first regulation unit exemplifies a form in which one member is provided in the vertical direction (moving direction of the moving body), but the present invention is not limited to this, and 2 It may be divided into two or more.

Further, in the above embodiment, the embodiment in which the second regulation portion is the lower parts 336L and 336R of the cover members 307L and 307R provided on the second position side of the first regulation portion is illustrated, but the second regulation portion is not necessarily It is not provided on the second position side of the first regulation unit, and if the movement of the moving body can be regulated to the side opposite to the first position when the movement of the moving body is regulated at the second position, It may be provided on the side of the first regulation section or the like.

Further, in the above embodiment, the embodiment in which the second regulating portion (lower portions 336L, 336R of the cover members 307L, 307R) is provided in the base portion 301 has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be provided at a place other than the base portion 301. Specifically, the structure fixed to the game board may be set as the second regulating section, and the first regulating section may be stopped by this structure.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first movable portion 302A and the second movable portion 302B are designed to move in the vertical direction between the first position and the second position, but the present invention is limited to this. It may be possible to move between the first position and the second position in the left-right direction, the front-back direction, and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first movable portion 302A and the second movable portion 302B are designed to freely fall from the first position to the second position due to their own weight, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be driven up and down. Specifically, the movable body 302 may be raised or lowered by an arm or the like that can be driven by a motor.

Further, in this embodiment, as an example of the moving means of the drive bodies 310L and 310R, for example, the effect motors 308L and 308R, the drive gear 338, the driven gear 339, the guide shafts 306L and 306R, and the groove portion 321 are illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and other means of transportation such as rack gears and pinion gears may be applied.

Further, in the above embodiment, the second movable portion 302B is invisible or difficult to see due to the first movable portion 302A at the first position, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first position is not limited to this. In some cases, a part or all of them may be visible.

Further, in the above embodiment, the movable body 302 is composed of a first movable portion 302A and a second movable portion 302B rotatably connected to the first movable portion 302A. It is not limited to, and may have a plurality of movable parts of 3 or more. Further, the second movable portion may be provided so as to be bendable and deformable with respect to the first movable portion. Further, in the above embodiment, the first movable portion 302A and the second movable portion 302B are rotatably connected to each other by the second arm portions 326L and 326R provided on the second movable portion 302B side. The present invention is not limited to this, and an arm may be provided in the first movable portion 302A, and the arm and the second movable portion 302B may be rotatably connected to each other.

Further, in the above embodiment, at the first position, the movable body 302 is held by the effect solenoids 318L and 318R (holding means) that are locked to the first movable portion 302A, but the holding means is not limited to this. May be provided in the vicinity of the second movable portion 302B in the first position, and may be held in the first position by locking the second movable portion 302B. Further, in addition to the holding means for locking to the first movable portion 302A, the second movable portion 302B may be auxiliaryly held by a holding means separate from the holding means.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the description of the second embodiment, the same reference numerals may be given to the parts common to the first embodiment, and the description thereof may be omitted.

Hereinafter, the second embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 15 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. FIG. 16 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the description of each step of the flowchart in the present embodiment, for example, the part described as "step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1".

The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 15, on the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are each composed of, for example, 7 segments or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes), and are identified in a special symbol game which is an example of a variable display game. A special symbol (also referred to as a "special figure"), which is a plurality of types of possible identification information (special identification information), is variably displayed (variable display). Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". ..

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 5, the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game are supported. For example, in a decorative symbol display area that is a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can identify each are variably displayed. A plurality of types of decorative symbols that are variably displayed in each decorative symbol display area may be given different symbol numbers, for example, any one of "1" to "9". The variable display of such a decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, on the screen of the image display device 5, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. Then, in the special symbol game, one of the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is started. Fluctuation of the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". After that, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C on the image display device 5. , The fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol), which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed.

As described above, on the screen of the image display device 5, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A or the special figure using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is used. In synchronization with the figure game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified by each are variably displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as "deriving"). When the variable display of various display symbols such as special symbols and decorative symbols is synchronized, the start and end of the variable display are performed at the same timing (same or similar), and the variable display period is about the same. (Same or similar). The effect image showing the decorative pattern is also called an identification information image. Therefore, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the variable display of the effect image showing the decorative symbol as the identification information image is displayed. Is performed, and an effect image showing a definite decorative pattern as a display result is derived.

For example, to derive and display various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol is to display identification information such as a decorative symbol as a stop display (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and end the variable display. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol becomes "0" and the decoration is displayed. The design may be stagnant and displayed, and may be in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction, for example. Such a display state of the decorative symbol is also called a temporary stop display of the decorative symbol, and although the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol is not definitively displayed, the decorative symbol changes due to scroll display or update display. The player can recognize that this is not the case. It should be noted that the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol may include displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction. ..

A first hold display unit 5HR and a second hold display unit 5HL are arranged on the screen of the image display device 5. The first hold display unit 5HR displays the number of first special figure hold storage so as to be identifiable. The first special figure hold storage number is the number of variable display holdes corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The second hold display unit 5HL displays the number of second special figure hold storage so as to be identifiable. The second special figure hold storage number is the number of variable display holdes corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The variable display hold corresponding to the special figure game is such that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. It occurs based on the starting prize by doing. That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously satisfied start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game has not yet been satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot game state, etc., the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Is done.

For example, due to the occurrence of the first start prize in which the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening, the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A (first start condition). ) Is satisfied, and if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the number of stored first special figures is 1. It is added (incremented), and the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, due to the occurrence of the second start prize in which the game ball passes (enters) the second start prize opening, the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B (second start condition). ) Is satisfied, and if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second special figure hold storage number is 1. It is added (incremented), and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the number of stored special figures of the first special figure is decremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. Is started, the second special figure reserved memory number is decremented by 1. If the number of reserved first special figures reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") when the first start prize is generated, the first start condition is not satisfied and is based on the start prize. The special figure game is invalidated, and only the prize ball may be paid out. Further, when the second start prize is generated, if the number of reserved second special figures reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the second start condition is not satisfied and is based on the start prize. The special figure game is invalidated, and only the prize ball may be paid out.

In the first hold display unit 5HR, hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the first special figure is performed. In the second hold display unit 5HL, the hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the second special figure is performed. The variable display hold storage number obtained by adding the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number is also particularly referred to as a total hold storage number. The term "special figure holding memory number" usually refers to a concept including all of the first special figure holding storage number, the second special figure holding storage number, and the total holding storage number, but in particular, a part of these (for example, for example). It may also refer to the concept of including the number of reserved memory of the first special figure and the number of stored memory of the second special figure, but excluding the total number of reserved memories).

The first hold display unit 5HR may be configured so that, for example, the first hold display is left-justified. The first hold display unit 5HR is provided with four display parts corresponding to the upper limit of the number of hold storages of the first special figure, "4", and the hold numbers "1", "2", and "3" are provided in order from the left end. , "4" may be associated with each other. When the number of hold of the special figure game using the first special figure increases due to the establishment of the first start condition, if there is no other first hold display in the first hold display section 5HR, the hold is held in the first hold display section 5HR. At the leftmost display part corresponding to the number "1", a new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increased number of first special figure hold storages. If there is another 1st hold display on the 1st hold display unit 5HR, the new 1st hold display is hidden on the right side of the display part where the other 1st hold display is performed. Add to the part (corresponding to any of the hold numbers "2" to "4"). When there are a plurality of first hold displays in the first hold display unit 5HR and a special figure game using the first special figure is started due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the first hold display unit 5HR While erasing (digesting) the first hold display in the leftmost display part corresponding to the hold number "1", each of the first hold displays in the other display parts corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4" is displayed. Move (shift) in the direction (left side) of the erased display part. As described above, the first hold display unit 5HR is configured to perform the hold display corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A which has not been started yet.

The second hold display unit 5HL may be configured so that, for example, the second hold display is right-justified. The second hold display unit 5HL is provided with four display parts corresponding to the upper limit of the number of hold storages of the second special figure, "4", and the hold numbers "1", "2", and "3" are provided in order from the right end. , "4" may be associated with each other. When the number of hold of the special figure game using the second special figure increases due to the establishment of the second start condition, if there is no other second hold display in the second hold display section 5HL, the hold is held in the second hold display section 5HL. At the rightmost display part corresponding to the number "1", a new second hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increased number of second special figure hold storages. If there is another 2nd hold display in the 2nd hold display unit 5HL, the new 2nd hold display is hidden on the left side of the display part where the other 2nd hold display is performed. Add to the part (corresponding to any of the hold numbers "2" to "4"). When there are a plurality of second hold displays in the second hold display unit 5HL and a special figure game using the second special figure is started due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second hold display unit 5HL The second hold display in the rightmost display part corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested), and each of the second hold displays in the display parts corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4" is displayed. Move (shift) in the direction (right side) of the erased display part. As described above, the second hold display unit 5HL is configured to perform the hold display corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B which has not been started yet.

A display for displaying the number of reserved special figures may be provided together with the first reserved display unit 5HR and the second reserved display unit 5HL, or in place of the first reserved display unit 5HR and the second reserved display unit 5HL. .. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the number of special symbol hold storage can be specified on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B together with the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL. A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B for displaying are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of hold storages of the first special figure in a identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second special figure hold storage so as to be identifiable. The number of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B corresponds to, for example, the upper limit values (for example, "4") of the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number, respectively (for example, 4). It is configured to include (1) LEDs.

A small symbol display area 5L, which is smaller than the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, is provided on the upper left side of the screen of the image display device 5. In the small symbol display area 5V, the variable display of the small symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. The effect image showing a small pattern is also called a broadcast information image. Therefore, in the small symbol display area 5V provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect image showing the small symbol to be the broadcast information image is variably displayed, and the effect image showing the confirmed small symbol to be the display result is displayed. Derived.

In this way, on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of a small symbol different from the decorative symbol is performed. During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation of the final decorative symbol that will be the display result, the variable display of the small symbol is continuously performed in a certain display mode, and disappears from the screen or is obstructed. It is not shielded by. Therefore, the small symbol display area 5V is configured to be always visible, and the player can always visually recognize the variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 5V. The small symbol that is variably displayed in the small symbol display area 5V is also referred to as a constant small symbol or a small symbol for production. In the small symbol display area 5V, there are a plurality of types in which each of the plurality of types of decorative symbols can be identified in a display mode in which a part or all of the decorative symbols are common to each of the plurality of types of decorative symbols, such as a symbol indicating a number as well as a part indicating a number in the decorative symbol. The effect image showing the small symbol of the above may be variably displayed as the broadcast information image. The small symbol may be displayed only when the decorative symbol is hidden. The variable display of the small symbol may be difficult to see or invisible during the execution period of the full-screen notice effect described later.

A fourth symbol is provided next to the special symbol, the decorative symbol, and the normal symbol, and the variable display of the fourth symbol may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. The variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed and hidden at regular time intervals in a specific display color (for example, blue) in the fourth symbol display area provided on or outside the screen of the image display device 5, for example. It is realized by continuing the display control that repeats and. However, when compared with the display result in the variable display of the fourth symbol, the display result in the variable display of the small symbol may be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

Further, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are provided at positions away from the display screen of the image display device 5, such as the right side of the game area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. Has been done. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player who is paying attention to the effect of the display on the image display device 5 to check the display state on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the variable display of the special symbol progresses. It may be difficult to recognize whether or not the display result is inside and whether or not the display result is derived. On the other hand, by performing variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 5V provided on the screen of the image display device 5 and deriving the display result, whether or not the variable display is in progress is determined. Whether or not the display result is derived can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

Below the image display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The ordinary winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed to a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. It is equipped with (ordinary electric accessory) and forms a second start winning opening.

As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state. Do not close. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the on state, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. ) Make it open. The normally variable winning ball device 6B is normally opened when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter (pass) through the second starting winning opening, while the expansion when the solenoid 81 is in the on state. It may be configured so that the game ball is less likely to enter (pass) than in the open state. As described above, the normal variable winning ball device 6B has a first variable state such as an open state in which the game ball can pass (enter) through the second starting winning opening or an expanded open state, and the game ball cannot pass (enter) in the first variable state. It is configured to be able to change to a second variable state such as a closed state or a normally open state where it is difficult to pass (enter).

The game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (prize game medium), and the first reserved storage number is a predetermined upper limit value. If it is (for example, "4") or less, the first starting condition is satisfied. If a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 22B, and the second reserved storage number is equal to or less than the predetermined upper limit value. The second starting condition is satisfied.

The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers from each other. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may directly pay out the game balls to be prize balls, or may give points corresponding to the number of game balls to be prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 16, and a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form a big prize opening as.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is in the off state, the large winning opening door is in the closed state and the game ball passes through (entering) the large winning opening. become unable. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door is on, the big winning door opens the big winning door and the game ball passes through (entering) the big winning door. ) It becomes easier. In this way, the large winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous to the player. do. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the large winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the large winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the large winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball passes through another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls will be paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the large winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball can enter the large winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the large winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to pass (enter) the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. It becomes a disadvantageous second state.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 15, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and has a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol (also called "ordinary diagram" or "ordinary diagram") is variably displayed (variable display). Such a variable display of a normal pattern is called a normal figure game (also referred to as a "normal figure game"). Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal figure hold indicator 25C for displaying the number of normal figure hold storages as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the gate switch 21 of FIG. 16 is provided.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be done. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on the fact that the game balls that have entered any of the general prize openings are detected by the predetermined general prize ball switch. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 are provided around the gaming area. Decorative LEDs may be arranged around each structure (for example, a normal winning ball device 6A, a normal variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a gaming ball as a gaming medium toward a gaming area is provided. For example, the hitting ball operation handle adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the amount of operation (rotation amount) by the player or the like.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) An upper plate (ball hitting plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower plate is provided for holding (storing) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is. The stick controller 31A includes an operation rod gripped by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator hangs when the player grips the operation rod). There is. The trigger button can be operated by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger (for example, index finger) while the player holds the operating rod of the stick controller 31A with an operating hand (for example, left hand). It suffices if it is configured as follows. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button may be built in the operation rod.

A controller sensor unit 35A including a tilting direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit is two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the side of the player facing the pachinko game machine 1. Four transmissive types that combine (pair) and two transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pair) arranged perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player's side. It suffices if it is configured to include a photo sensor.

The member forming the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B capable of a player performing a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 31A) on the upper surface of the upper plate body. It is provided. The push button 31B may be configured so that a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35B for detecting a player's operation action performed on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, and a lamp control board 14, as shown in FIG. 16, for example. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board are arranged on the back surface of the game board of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. The main board 11 controls lighting and extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and controls the lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display or controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting, extinguishing, and coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control.

For example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted on the main board 11. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting the game ball and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the winning door.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives an image display device 5, speakers 8L, and 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical components such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 operates the display operation of the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the operation of turning on the game effect lamp 9, the decorative LED, and the like, and the operation of turning them off. It has a function of determining the control content for causing the electric component for the effect to execute a predetermined effect operation, such as all or a part.

The audio control board 13 is a control board for audio output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs audio from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. It is equipped with a processing circuit that executes audio signal processing for this purpose. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for controlling lamp output provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12, such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit that supplies the drive current for turning on and off the light.

As shown in FIG. 16, detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B), and a count switch 23 are transmitted to the main board 11. The wiring is connected. The various switches may have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a switch called a sensor. Further, a wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the ordinary symbol display 20, and the like is connected to the main board 11.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. It includes lamp control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like. In addition, the effect control command also includes an abnormality winning notification command for instructing abnormality notification. When the abnormality notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the error notification process (S57) is executed under the control of the effect control board 12 as described later (see FIG. 26). Each of these effect control commands has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, in which the first byte represents MODE (command classification) and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data may always be "1", and the first bit of the EXT data may be set in advance so as to be "0".

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

The one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 may have at least a RAM 102 built in in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101, the random number circuit 104, the I / O 105, and the like may be externally attached.

In the game control microcomputer 100, numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the progress of the game is updatablely counted by, for example, a random number circuit 104. Random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as a random number circuit 104, or may be updated by software when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined computer program. You may. For example, a predetermined random number value is shown in a random counter provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100, or in a random counter provided in an internal register separate from the RAM 102. Numerical data may be stored, and the CPU 103 may update the stored value periodically or irregularly so that the random value is updated.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data, table data, and the like used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 is configured with table data that constitutes a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 103 to transmit control signals that are various control commands from the main board 11, and a variation pattern table that stores a plurality of types of variation patterns. The table data to be used is stored. In the RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100, various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are temporarily stored in a rewritable manner.

The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 120, and an image display device. The display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in 5, the random number circuit 124 that updates the numerical data indicating the random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120, and the I / O 125. And are installed.

As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, thereby executing the process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes various variation data to the RAM 122, and the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stores the variation data in the RAM 122. A variable data read operation for reading various temporarily stored variable data, a reception operation in which the effect control CPU 120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, and an effect control CPU 120 is I / A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via the O125 is also performed. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device as an electric component for effect included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on various information transmitted from the main board 11 as an effect control command.

The effect control CPU 120, ROM 121, and RAM 122 may be included in the one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. The effect control board 12 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5 and wiring for transmitting an effect sound signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13. Wiring for transmitting an illumination signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Further, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the stick controller 31A has been detected from the controller sensor unit 35A, and a game for the push button 31B. A wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a person's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

In the effect control board 12, for example, numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the effect operation is updatablely counted by a random number circuit 124, a random counter for effect provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the like. .. The random number used to control such an effect operation is also called an effect random number. As an example, on the side of the effect control board 12, numerical data indicating various effect determination random values such as a random value for determining a stop symbol in a variable display of a decorative symbol and a random value for determining a notice effect can be counted. Is controlled by.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 16 stores various data tables and the like used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 contains a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination tables, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The effect control pattern is, for example, from process data including effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, etc.) and an end code associated with the effect control process timer determination value. It is configured. The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation.

In the effect control execution data included in the effect control pattern, the display control data indicates, for example, various image display modes on the screen of the image display device 5. More specifically, the display control data includes various symbols such as a background, a decorative symbol, and a small symbol that constitute each frame (an image that is a unit to be switched and displayed in a frame cycle) displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. , Data for specifying the type, position, size, etc. of the effect image indicating a character or the like, data for specifying the display order (priority) when displaying a plurality of effect images in an overlapping manner, and the like may be included. The data indicating the display order (priority) of the effect images may be data indicating which of the plurality of effect images is arranged on the front side when viewed from the player.

The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120 or the like. For example, the display control unit 123 controls the variable display of the decorative pattern and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed in the display screen of the image display device 5. As an example, the display control unit 123 may be equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, or the like. The VDP may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or a microprocessor for image processing generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. Any configured image data memory may be used.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 has an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. It is composed including and. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command transmitted to the audio control board 13 (sound effect signal), and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14 (electricity). Decorative signal) etc. are output.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game is performed using a game ball as a game medium, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a gaming ball, a predetermined hitting ball is launched based on a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) of a hitting ball operation handle installed at the lower right of the front surface of the housing of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A game ball as a game medium is launched toward the game area by a launch motor or the like provided in the device. When the game ball that has flowed down the game area passes (enters) the first start winning opening (first starting area) formed in the normal winning ball device 6A, the game ball is moved by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The first start condition is satisfied due to the detection or the like. After that, based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A starts. Will be done.

Further, when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening (second starting area) formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. As a result, the second starting condition is satisfied. After that, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B starts. Will be done. However, when the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the normally open state or the closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second starting winning opening.

Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 26 is detected by the gate switch 21 of FIG. 16, the normal symbol start condition for executing the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 is established. After that, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, for example, that the previous normal symbol game has ended. In the normal symbol game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the confirmed normal symbol, which is the variable display result of the normal symbol, is stopped and displayed (derivated display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol loss". In response to the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per normal figure", the opening control and the expansion opening control are performed so that the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 6B becomes the tilting position. , Closing control or normal opening control that returns to the vertical position after a predetermined time elapses is performed.

When the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started, or when the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started, it is special. Whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is to be a "big hit" as a predetermined specific display result is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 shown in FIG. Is transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the effect control board 12.

After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived. Is displayed. "Left", "middle", and "right" decorations arranged on the screen of the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a variable display of a decorative symbol (directed symbol) different from the special symbol is performed. The decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" are also referred to as left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol, respectively. In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, the definite special that results in the variable display of the special symbol. When the symbol is derived and displayed, the image display device 5 derives and displays a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol.

When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the special symbol, the variable display result (special symbol display result) becomes a "big hit" (specific display result), which is an advantageous specific gaming state for the player. It is controlled to the jackpot game state. That is, whether or not the variable display game state is controlled corresponds to whether or not the variable display result becomes a "big hit", and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. As a variable display result of the special symbol, when the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed and the lost symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result (special symbol display result) becomes "miss" (non-specific display result).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display result is "big hit", it is determined in advance on the screen of the image display device 5. A definite decorative pattern that is a combination of big hits is derived and displayed. As an example, the same decorative symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", so that the jackpot combination is confirmed. It suffices if the decorative pattern is derived and displayed.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening is opened and the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the first state which is advantageous for the player. Then, a period until a predetermined upper limit of opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds or 0.1 seconds) elapses, or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls enter the large winning opening and a winning ball is generated. During the period until, a round game (also simply referred to as "round") in which the big winning opening is continuously opened is executed. During the period other than the execution period of such a round game, the large winning opening is closed, and the winning ball is difficult or impossible to be generated. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, the count switch 23 detects the winning ball, and each detection, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. The round game in the jackpot game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, "2" or "15") is reached.

When the variable display result is "big hit", it suffices to include the case where the big hit type is any one of "non-probable change", "probable change", and "probable change". When the jackpot type is "non-probability change" or "probability variation", the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to the first state (the jackpot is open) which is advantageous for the player as a round game in the jackpot game state. A normal open round is performed with a relatively long upper limit (eg, 29.5 seconds). On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probable", the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (the jackpot is open) is relatively short as a round game in the jackpot game state. A short-term open round of time (eg 0.1 seconds) is performed. The jackpot game state in which the normal open round is executed is also referred to as the first specific game state. The jackpot game state in which the short-term open round is executed is also referred to as the second specific game state.

In the jackpot game state when the jackpot type is "probability", the upper limit time for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state which is advantageous for the player in the short-term open round (the jackpot is opened by the jackpot door). The upper limit of the open state) is the second period (for example, 0.1 seconds) shorter than the first period in the normal open round. In addition, the same control as in the case where the normal opening round is executed may be performed except that the opening period of the large winning opening is controlled to be the second period in the short-term opening round. Alternatively, when a short-term open round is executed, the number of executions of the round game is less than the number of executions of the first round (for example, "15"), which is the number of executions of the normal open round (for example, "2"). ). That is, the jackpot game state in which the short-term open round is executed is in the first state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) the jackpot in each round game as compared with the jackpot game state in which the normal open round is executed. The change period may be at least one of the second period, which is shorter than the first period, and the second round, in which the number of round game executions is less than the first round. Just do it.

When such a short-term open round is executed, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball wins in the large winning opening. However, since the opening period of the big winning opening is the second period (0.1 seconds, etc.), the big hit game state in which the ball is not actually obtained (prize ball) is obtained. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state (second specific gaming state) based on the jackpot type being "probable" is the jackpot gaming state (first specific) based on the jackpot type being "non-probable" or "probable". It becomes a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the game state). In this way, based on the fact that the jackpot type is "non-probability change" or "probability change", when the jackpot game state in which the normal open round is executed is reached, the first prize ball is likely to pass through the jackpot. In the changing mode, control is performed to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into a first state (open state) and a second state (closed state). On the other hand, in the case of a big hit game state in which a short-term open round is executed based on the big hit type being "probable", the second change mode in which the game ball is difficult to pass through the big winning opening is special. Control is performed to change the variable winning ball device 7 into a first state (open state) and a second state (closed state).

After the jackpot game state ends, the probability that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" (big hit probability) is controlled to a probability variation state that is higher than the normal state based on the establishment of the predetermined probability variation control condition. There is. In the probability change state, a predetermined probability change end condition is satisfied, such as the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 200 times) or the jackpot game state being started before the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until it is done. The probability variation end condition may be satisfied when the next jackpot game state is started, regardless of the number of times the variable display is executed. After the jackpot game state ends, the average variable display time may be controlled to a shorter time state than the normal state. In the time saving state, a predetermined time saving end condition is satisfied, such as the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or the jackpot game state being started before the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until it is done. As an example, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", the gaming state becomes the time saving state after the jackpot gaming state ends. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability change" or "probability change", the game state becomes the probability change state after the jackpot game state ends.

In the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the normal variable winning ball device 6B is placed in the first variable state (open state or expanded open state) in an advantageous changing mode in which the game ball easily passes (enters) the second starting winning opening than in the normal state. And the second variable state (closed state or normally open state). For example, the normal symbol display 20 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the variable display result of the normal symbol in each normal symbol game is "normal". Control to improve the probability of "hit the figure" compared to the normal state, tilt control time to control the tilt of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result being "hit the normal figure" The normal variable winning ball device 6B is changed into the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode by controlling to make the normal variable winning ball device 6B longer than in the normal state and by controlling to increase the number of tilts as compared with the normal state. Just do it. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. As described above, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball device 6B into the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous changing mode is called high opening control (also referred to as “high base control”). By being controlled to such a probabilistic state or a time saving state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit" is shortened, and the special gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. Even when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the high opening control may not be performed.

In the image display device 5, the decorative symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) are stopped in a state of being consistent with the jackpot combination for a predetermined time. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to shaking, enlargement / reduction or deformation, multiple decorative symbols fluctuating synchronously with the same symbol, or the display positions being swapped. The effect performed in the state where the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is referred to as the reach effect. As a reach effect, a character image (an effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative pattern is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, the display mode of the background image is changed, and a moving image different from the decorative pattern is displayed. An effect operation different from changing the variation mode of the decorative pattern, such as reproducing and displaying an image, may be executed. Not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (blinking operation) in the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like are different from the operation mode before the reach mode. The operation mode may be included in the reach effect. The reach state and its state are called the reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is not a jackpot combination, a “miss” occurs and the variable display state ends.

As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as reach patterns) having different operation modes (effect modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" (also referred to as reliability or jackpot reliability) differs depending on the production mode in each reach production. That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" can be different depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed. In this embodiment, as an example, a normal reach effect (normal reach) and a super reach effect (super reach) are preset. Then, when the reach effect in the super reach is executed, the possibility that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" (big hit expectation) is higher than in the case where the reach effect in the normal reach is executed. The reach effect that becomes the super reach may include a plurality of types of reach effects including a super reach that executes a specific reach effect that has a higher expectation of a big hit than other super reach.

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be in the reach state, and the variable display result may be a "big hit". Depending on the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, a variable display effect for notifying the player may be executed. As an example, it suffices if the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream" can be executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. It suffices to decide whether or not to execute the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" in response to the determination of the variation pattern on the main board 11 side.

In the variable display effect of "pseudo-ren", the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that becomes the variable display result after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the fact that the start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once. Can be performed up to a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 3 times) to display the effect of temporarily stopping the game until it is derived and displayed, and then changing it again (pseudo-continuous fluctuation). The number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is the display of "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbols, excluding the initial variation from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the first temporary stop of all decorative symbols. It suffices as long as the number of times the decorative symbol revariates in all areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream", as an example, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", a plurality of predetermined pseudo-ream chance eyes of a special combination are used. A decorative pattern that is one of the types of loss combinations is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", a predetermined effect such as an image display which is a re-variation effect may be executed along with a plurality of variable displays including the initial variation. The re-variation effect is not limited to displaying an image on the screen of the image display device 5, and may include an arbitrary effect operation using various effect devices.

As an example of the re-variation effect different from the image display, a plurality of decorative LEDs provided inside or outside the game area during each variation display (including the initial variation) by the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream". Of these, the ones that are lit may be controlled so as to increase one by one. Further, during each variation display (including the initial variation), the display color of the decorative LED may be controlled to change, or the lighting of the plurality of decorative LEDs may change. It may be controlled by.

As a further example of the re-variation effect different from the image display, a production model provided inside or outside the game area during each variation display (including the initial variation) by the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" (including the initial variation). The movable member) may be controlled to operate. At this time, the operation mode of the effect model (movable member) may be controlled to change during the period of each variation display (including the initial variation), or among a plurality of effect models (movable members). It may be controlled to change what works with.

During the period of each variation display (including the initial variation) by the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", it may be controlled to display a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image on the screen of the image display device 5. .. Further, as a re-variation effect, for example, when a decorative symbol that is a pseudo-continuous chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed, a sound effect that is a special sound effect may be controlled to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition to some or all of these re-variable effects, or in place of some or all of these re-variable effects, the decorative LEDs are lit or blinking, the operation of the production model, the display of the production image, and the sound effects. Of the output of, it may be controlled to execute a re-variation effect in which a part or all of the output is combined. At this time, when the re-variation effect is executed by combining a plurality of types of effect modes, or when the re-variation effect is executed a plurality of times, as compared with the case where the re-variation effect is executed by only one type of effect mode. When the effect mode in the above changes, the possibility that a predetermined game value such as the possibility that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" (big hit expectation) may be increased.

In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-ream fluctuation (re-variation) once to three times. Based on this, it is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative pattern was started two to four times in a row. Then, when the number of repeated executions of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) (number of pseudo-reams) increases, there is a possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" (big hit expectation) than when the number of pseudo-reams is small. It gets higher. In addition, the rate of occurrence of the effect may be controlled to change depending on the number of times the pseudo-ream variation is repeatedly executed (the number of pseudo-reams). For example, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation may be performed twice to be "reach confirmed", and the pseudo-continuous fluctuation may be performed three times to be "super reach confirmed". It should be noted that the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) in the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" may be executed up to a number of times more than 1 to 3 times, for example, 4 times or 5 times.

In addition to "pseudo-ream", as variable display effects using such variable display operation of decorative patterns, for example, "slip", "development chance eye", "development chance eye end", "chance eye stop slip" Various production operations such as, may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of "slip", "left", "middle", and "right" are displayed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result. After changing the decorative symbol in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbol display area (for example, "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc.) is displayed. After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, a predetermined number (for example, "1" or "2") of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporarily stopped display area (for example, "left" decorative symbol display area 5L) And one or both of the decorative symbol display area 5R on the "right"), the decorative symbol is changed again and then stopped, so that the decorative symbol to be stopped is changed.

In the variable display effect of the "development chance eye", the decorations of "left", "middle", and "right" are displayed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result. After the decorative symbols that make up the development chance eyes included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set as the reach state. Reach production starts. On the other hand, in the variable display effect of "end of development chance", after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". , An effect display is performed in which a predetermined combination of decorative symbols is derived and displayed as a final decorative symbol as a development chance eye. In the variable display effect of "slip after stopping the chance", as in the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream", from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result. , "Left", "Middle", "Right" Decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R After temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative pattern of the lost combination (special combination) that is a pseudo-consecutive chance. Unlike the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream" in which the decorative pattern is changed again in all of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative pattern is changed again in a part of the decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. By doing so, an effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed.

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect or the variable display effect such as "pseudo-ream", for example, displaying a predetermined effect image, displaying an image as a message, or outputting a voice is used for decoration. Due to the effect operation different from the variable display operation of the symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol may be in the reach state, the reach effect by super reach may be executed, and the variable display result is ". A notice effect may be executed to notify the player in advance that there is a possibility of becoming a "big hit".

The effect operation that becomes the advance notice effect is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Is executed (started) before the reach mode is reached (before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right"). Further, the advance notice effect for notifying that the variable display result may be a "big hit" may include one executed after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode. In this way, the advance notice effect can be in the big hit game state at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to the derivation of the finalized special symbol or the confirmed decorative symbol which is the variable display result. Anything that can foretell sex will do. A plurality of notice patterns are prepared in advance according to the content (effect mode) of the effect operation when the advance notice effect is executed.

The advance notice effect includes a look-ahead advance notice effect (also referred to as a look-ahead effect). In the look-ahead notice effect, the variable display result is "big hit" according to the effect mode before the variable display is executed, which is the target (notice target) for which the possibility that the variable display result will be "big hit" is announced. It is a notice production that can announce the possibility of becoming. In particular, the pre-reading advance notice effect that continuously gives advance notice over the variable display of the decorative pattern that is executed a plurality of times in response to a plurality of special figure games is also referred to as a continuous advance notice effect. In the look-ahead notice effect, before the variable display to be notified is started, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" is announced based on, for example, the hold memory of the special figure game due to the occurrence of the start prize. The production operation for this is started. In contrast to the look-ahead notice effect, the notice effect whose execution is started after the variable display to be notified is started is called a single notice effect (also referred to as a single notice, the variable notice or a variable display notice effect). NS.

In this embodiment, as an example of the look-ahead notice effect, the display portion of the first hold display in the first hold display unit 5HR and the display portion of the second hold display in the second hold display unit 5HL are set as the display mode in the normal state. By changing to a different display mode, a pre-reading notice effect of "hold display change" for notifying the possibility of becoming a "big hit" in the variable display to be noticed is executed. More specifically, the display color in the display part that displays the number of special figure reservations that can be specified is a specific color (for example, red, green, or blue) different from the predetermined color (for example, white) in the normal state. By doing so, it is sufficient to be able to notify that the variable display result is more likely to be a "big hit" than usual. In addition, by setting the display pattern in the first hold display and the second hold display to a specific pattern (for example, Sakura pattern) different from the normal one, the variable display result is more likely to be a "big hit" than usual. May be able to be notified. Alternatively, by setting the display mode to show a predetermined message (for example, "secret") as the first hold display or the second hold display, it is notified that the display color is more likely to change to a specific color (for example). Suggestion) You may be able to do it. A hold display that suggests that such a display mode is likely to change to a specific mode is also referred to as a suggestion hold display. The pre-reading notice effect of "hold display change" is also referred to as a hold display change effect.

The look-ahead notice effect executed based on the occurrence of the start prize is executed (started) after the start prize occurs, before the player can determine whether or not the notice content by the look-ahead notice effect is realized. Anything is fine. For example, the pre-reading notice effect that announces that a certain start prize may occur may result in a reach state, rather than at least the variable display state of the decorative symbol based on the occurrence of the start prize becomes the reach state (or non-reach state). Anything that is executed (started) before may be used. In addition, the look-ahead notice effect that announces that the variable display result may become a "big hit" due to the occurrence of a certain start prize is at least more than the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display based on the occurrence of the start prize. Anything that is executed (started) before may be used.

When the hold display change effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display may or may not change. Among the hold display change effects, an effect in which the display mode of the hold display changes is also referred to as a hold display change success effect. Among the hold display change effects, an effect in which the display mode of the hold display does not change is also referred to as a hold display change failure effect. In addition, the hold display change effect includes a hold display change common effect. When the hold display change effect is executed, first, the hold display change common effect that is commonly executed when the display mode of the hold display is changed and when it is not changed is executed. In the hold display change common effect, for example, an effect image showing a character prepared in advance (character for change effect: for example, character CH1 shown in FIG. 29B described later) is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and is subject to advance notice. It suffices to include an action effect that has an effect on the hold display corresponding to the variable display.

The effect image showing the character CH1 in the hold display change common effect is an example of the specific effect image. The promotion display image P shown in FIG. 46 (C), which will be described later, is also an example of the specific effect image. The effect image showing the character CH1 may be continuously displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 over a plurality of variable displays based on the setting according to the decision result of executing the hold display change effect. The effect image showing the character CH1 to be the specific effect image may be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the player as viewed from at least a part of the effect image showing the decorative pattern to be the identification information image. In this case, during the period in which the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol is derived, the display mode of the effect image showing the character CH1 to be the specific effect image is displayed at the position overlapping on the front side of the effect image showing the decorative symbol. It is in a stationary mode.

The effect effect in the hold display change common effect is to affect either the first hold display in the first hold display unit 5HR or the second hold display in the second hold display unit 5HL, so that the display mode of the hold display is changed. Any display effect that suggests that it may change may be sufficient. Along with such a display effect, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a part or all of a light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED is lit in a predetermined lighting mode. The movable member of the above may be operated in a predetermined operation mode.

When the hold display change success effect is executed after the hold display change common effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display exerted by the action effect is changed. As described above, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display on which the action is applied after the action effect in the hold display change common effect is executed is also referred to as the hold change effect as the first success effect. On the other hand, when the hold display change failure effect is executed after the hold display change common effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display exerted by the action effect is not changed. In this way, although the action effect in the hold display change common effect is executed, the effect in which the display mode of the hold display that exerts the action does not change is also referred to as a hold change gase effect as the first failure effect.

The effect of changing the display color of the hold display is also called the display color change effect. The effect of changing the display mode of the hold display to a display mode indicating a predetermined message (for example, "secret") is also referred to as a special display change effect.

When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is "non-reach" ("normal"). It includes a case where the variable display mode is "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") and a case where the variable display mode is "reach loss". When the variable display mode is "non-reach", after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not become the reach state, and a predetermined combination of decorative symbols that does not reach the reach (non-reach). Reach combination) is displayed (derived) as a stop. When the variable display mode is "reach", after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, and finally the jackpot combination is A combination of predetermined decorative symbols (reach combination) that does not become a stop display (derivation) is displayed. The decorative symbols constituting the non-reach combination and the reach combination may be included in the non-specific display result together with the special symbol which is the lost symbol.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled and then performs the necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, RAM 101 is cleared. In addition, the register of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set. As a result, after that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. When the initial setting is completed, interrupts are permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, the process for returning the internal state of the pachinko game machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed, and then the loop process may be started.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main side error processing, information output processing, game random number update processing, special symbol process processing, ordinary symbol process processing, command control processing, and the like. It includes processing to control the progress of.

The switch process is a process of determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. The error processing on the main side is a processing in which an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software.

As an example, the game random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 include a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. It suffices if the random number value MR5 for determining the figure display result is included. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit game state. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of types such as "non-probability", "probability", and "probability" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used for the purpose. The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any one of a plurality of prepared patterns. The random number value MR5 for determining the normal figure display result is in a closed state (normally open) of the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B with the variable display result of the normal symbol in the normal figure game as "per normal figure". It is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the open state (expanded open state) in which the game ball easily passes (enters) more frequently than the state).

In the special symbol process process included in the game control timer interrupt process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is displayed on the special symbol display device 4. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the operation and set the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 according to a predetermined procedure. The normal symbol process process controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20, and sets the variable display of the normal symbol and the tilting operation of the movable wing piece on the normal variable winning ball device 6B. It is a process that enables. In the normal symbol process processing, as a high opening control accompanying the time reduction control, the normal symbol display 20 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and each time. Control to improve the probability that the variable display result of the normal symbol will be "per normal" in the normal game, and the normal variable winning ball device based on the variable display result being "per normal" A part or all of control is performed in which the tilt control time for tilting the movable wing piece in 6B is made longer than in the normal state, and the number of tilts is increased as in the normal state.

The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12. As an example, in the command control process, the effect control board 12 among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 102. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, set the predetermined control data in the output port of the effect control INT signal to turn the effect control INT signal on for a predetermined time and then turn it off. By doing so, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (S101). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control flag setting unit, etc.). Run.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S101 of FIG. 17 as the start winning determination process. When the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 18 is started, the CPU 103 first starts based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is ON (S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (S201; Yes), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (S201; Yes). For example, it is determined whether or not it is "4") (S202). At this time, the CPU 103 holds the first special figure by reading the first hold storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first hold storage number counter provided in the predetermined area (game control counter setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 102. It suffices if the number of memories can be specified. When the first special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in S202 (S202; No), the start port buffer value which is the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the predetermined area (game control buffer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 102. Is set to "1" (S203).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in S201 (S201; No), or when the first special figure hold storage number reaches the upper limit value in S202 (S202; Yes), a normally variable winning ball device Based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by 6B, it is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is on (S204). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (S204; Yes), the second special figure hold storage number, which is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (S204; Yes). For example, it is determined whether or not it is "4") (S205). At this time, the CPU 103 holds the second special figure by reading the second hold storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second hold storage number counter provided in the predetermined area (game control counter setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 102. It suffices if the number of memories can be specified. When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in S205 (S205; No), the start port buffer value is set to "2" (S206).

After executing any of the processes of S203 and S206, the hold storage count value corresponding to the start port buffer value is updated to be added by 1 (S207). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase (increment). Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase (increment). In this way, when the first start condition is satisfied, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated to increase by 1, and when the second start condition is satisfied, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated to increase by 1. .. At this time, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.), is updated so as to be added by 1 (S208).

After executing the process of S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning prize (S209). As an example, in the processing of S209, a random number value for determining a special figure display result is selected from numerical data updated by a random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit or the like) of the random number circuit 104 or RAM 102. Numerical data indicating MR1, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted. Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored as hold data by being set at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (S210).

In the process of S210, for example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the hold data is set. Is set in the second special figure reservation storage unit. The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure game in which the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the first start winning is generated, but has not yet started. The special figure game) using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is stored as a hold memory. In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, and the second starting winning is generated, but the special drawing game has not been started yet. (Special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored as a hold memory.

The first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and is based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the passage (entry) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like are stored as pending data. Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ), Whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state, which of the plurality of jackpot types is used when the variable display result is "big hit", and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example). It is a hold storage information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a reach effect of super reach. As described above, the first special figure reservation storage unit has satisfied the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A, but has not yet started. The hold storage information of the special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 4A is stored.

The second special figure hold storage unit associates the winning order with the second starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number, and is based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the passage (entry) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like are stored as pending data. Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ), Whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state, which of the plurality of jackpot types is used when the variable display result is "big hit", and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example). It is a hold storage information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a reach effect of super reach. As described above, the second special figure reservation storage unit has satisfied the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, but has not yet started. The hold storage information of the special symbol game in the second special symbol display device 4B is stored.

Following the process of S210, a setting for transmitting a start port winning designation command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is made (S211). Subsequently, the random number value determination process at the time of winning is executed (S212). After that, a setting for transmitting the hold storage number notification command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is made (S213). Further, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" or "2" (S214). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "2" (S214; "2"), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (S215), and then the start winning determination process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "1" (S214; "1"), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (S216), and then S204. Proceed to processing. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S212 of FIG. 18 as the winning random number value determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, in the special symbol normal processing (S110 in FIG. 17, FIG. 22) described later, the special symbol display result is set as a "big hit" and the game is put into a big hit game state. Whether to control or not, and the fluctuation pattern are determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the random number value determination process at the time of winning of S212 at the starting winning timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). By doing so, it is determined whether or not the random value MR1 is determined to derive the jackpot symbol as the special symbol display result, and the random value MR3 determined as the variable pattern that sets the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state. Judgment as to whether or not there is. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the starting winning opening is started, whether or not the special symbol display result becomes a "big hit" and the decoration Whether or not to reach the reach state during the variable display of the symbol is predicted, and based on this prediction result, whether or not to execute the advance notice effect which is the look-ahead effect by the effect control CPU 120 or the like on the effect control board 12 side. Can be determined.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 19, the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in a predetermined area (game control flag setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 102, for example, to perform a pachinko game. The current gaming state of the machine 1 is specified (S401). More specifically, when the probability change flag is on, the game state is the probability change state, when the probability change flag is off and the time reduction flag is on, the game state is the time reduction state, and both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state. Further, by checking the value of the special figure process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control flag control unit, etc.), it is possible to determine whether or not the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the jackpot gaming state. I just need to be able to identify it.

The CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming state thus specified is in the jackpot gaming state (S402). At this time, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress, it is further determined whether or not the high base is in the high open control accompanying the time reduction control in the probability variation state or the time reduction state (S403). Whether or not the start port buffer value is "2" when it is determined in S402 that the jackpot is being hit (S402; Yes) or when it is determined in S403 that the base is high (S403; Yes). (S404).

When it is determined in S403 that the base is not high (S403; No), or when it is determined in S404 that the start port buffer value is "2" (S404; Yes), it is shown in FIG. Various variable display contents are determined using the random value extracted in the process of S209. In this embodiment, the variable display contents to be determined at the time of starting winning include "big hit", "super reach confirmation at the time of loss", "reach confirmation at the time of loss", and "general at the time of loss".

The CPU 103 sets a jackpot determination range in order to determine whether or not the variable display content is a "big hit". For example, from the specific display result determination table prepared in advance by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, data used for determining the special figure display result corresponding to the current gaming state (table data for determining the special figure display result). ) Is selected. In the table data for determining the special figure display result, the range of the determined value to which the special figure display result is assigned to the "big hit" may be set as the big hit determination range. This jackpot determination range is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in the process of S209. At this time, if the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, the variable display content is determined to be "big hit".

When it is determined that the variable display content is not "big hit" in response to the random value MR1 being outside the range of the big hit determination range, the super reach confirmation range and reach confirmation range at the time of loss are set. The super reach confirmation range and reach confirmation range at the time of loss are random values that can be determined in a fluctuation pattern with reach effect including super reach or normal reach regardless of the number of special figure reserved memories (random value for determining fluctuation pattern). The range of the numerical value MR3) may be predetermined.

When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, it is prepared in advance by using the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern and the variation pattern determination table prepared in advance by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101. The fluctuation pattern used in this variable display is determined from the plurality of fluctuation patterns. In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned to any of the plurality of fluctuation patterns. The CPU 103 determines the variation pattern to which the determination value matching the random number value MR3 is assigned as the variation pattern used in the present variable display. For example, in the variation pattern determination table used at the time of loss when the variable display result is "loss", the allocation of the determination values for a plurality of variation patterns is as shown in FIGS. 25 (B1) and 25 (B2). It differs depending on the number of reserved storages in the figure and the number of stored storages in the second special figure. However, some of the determined values are assigned to the same (or the same type) fluctuation pattern regardless of the number of first special figure reserved storage and the second special figure reserved storage number. In the table data constituting such a fluctuation pattern determination table, among the determination values assigned to the fluctuation pattern with superreach, the range of the determination values assigned to the fluctuation pattern with superreach regardless of the number of reserved special figures. However, it suffices if it is predetermined as a super reach determination range. Further, in the table data constituting the variation pattern determination table, among the determination values assigned to the variation patterns with reach effect including normal reach, they are assigned to the variation pattern with reach effect regardless of the number of special figure reserved storages. The range of the determined value may be predetermined as the reach determination range.

FIG. 20 shows an example of determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss when the variable display result is “loss”. When the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state without time reduction control, a fluctuation pattern determination table in which determination values as shown in FIG. 25 (B1) are assigned to the variation patterns is used. In this case, if the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the range of "295" to "300", it is determined that the fluctuation pattern with super reach is determined regardless of the number of stored memory in the first special figure. .. On the other hand, if the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the range of "271" to "300", it is uncertain whether or not superreach is involved according to the number of reserved memory of the first special figure. , It is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect including the normal reach is determined regardless of at least the number of reserved memories of the first special figure.

Further, during the time reduction in which the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variation state accompanied by a time reduction control or a time reduction state, a variation pattern determination table in which determination values as shown in FIG. 25 (B2) are assigned to the variation patterns is used. Be done. In this case, if the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the range of "295" to "300", it is determined that the fluctuation pattern accompanied by superreach is determined regardless of the number of stored memory in the second special figure. .. On the other hand, if the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the range of "289" to "300", it is determined that the fluctuation pattern with normal reach is determined regardless of the number of stored memory in the second special figure. ..

The number of special figure reservations (the number of first special figure reservations, the number of second special figure reservations) when the start winning is generated does not match the number of special figure reservations when the variable display is actually started. Not limited to this, it may change due to the execution of variable display or the occurrence of a new start prize after the start prize has occurred. Therefore, the table data selected due to the difference in the number of reserved special figures may not match between the judgment result at the start winning and the determination of the fluctuation pattern at the start of the variable display. It is generally difficult to determine and predict whether or not it will be decided. On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination table in this embodiment, when the variable display result is "missing", at least the determination value assigned to the variation pattern with super reach or the variation pattern with reach effect including normal reach is determined. A common decision value is included regardless of the number of reserved special figures. Therefore, regardless of the number of special figure reserved memories at the start winning prize or the start of the variable display in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whether or not it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the super reach is determined, and the reach effect including the normal reach. It can be determined whether or not it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern accompanied by is determined.

When the variable display result is "missing" in the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed, if the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the range of "295" to "300", the variable display content Is determined to be "super reach confirmed at the time of loss", and if the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the range of "271" to "300", the variable display content is "reach confirmed at the time of loss". judge. If the variable display result is "missing" during the time reduction control, if the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the range of "295" to "300", the variable display content Is determined to be "super reach confirmed at the time of loss", and if the random number knowledge MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the range of "289" to "300", the variable display content is "determined reach at the time of loss". judge.

When it is determined in S404 shown in FIG. 19 that the starting port buffer value is "1" instead of "2" (S404; No), a setting is made to limit the winning determination in the processing of S405 (S406). ). In this way, when the high opening control accompanying the time saving control is performed or when the big hit game state is performed, it is based on the occurrence of the start prize (first start prize) due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start prize opening. Limit the variable display content so that it is not judged. As a result, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, the first start is performed during high opening control or in the big hit game state. It is possible to ensure the soundness of the game by limiting the pre-reading notice based on the winning prize from being executed.

After that, the notification content at the time of starting winning is set according to the determination result by the processing of S405 and the setting by the processing of S406 (S407). According to the content of the notification, the setting for transmitting the winning determination result command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is made (S408), and then the winning random value determination process is terminated.

FIG. 21 shows a start opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command and a second starting opening winning designation command), a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command, and a second hold storage number notification command). A setting example of the winning judgment result command is shown. In this embodiment, a command B100H as a first starting opening winning designation command and a command B200H as a second starting opening winning designation command are prepared in advance as starting opening winning designation commands. The subscript H indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, as the hold storage number notification command, the command C1XXH which is the first hold storage number notification command and the command C2XXH which is the second hold storage number notification command are prepared in advance. It should be noted that XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the hold storage number notification command, different EXT data (for example, any of 00H to 04H) is set according to the special figure hold storage number. Further, a command C4XXXH, which is a winning determination result command, is prepared in advance.

When a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs, S202 shown in FIG. The first start condition is satisfied when it is determined in the process of 1 that the number of reserved memory of the first special figure has not reached the upper limit value. The first start condition is a condition for executing a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the first start condition is satisfied, the start port buffer value is set to "1" in the process of S203 shown in FIG. 18, and then the transmission setting is made by the process of S211 to move from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. On the other hand, the first start opening winning designation command is transmitted. Further, by setting the transmission by the process of S408 shown in FIG. 19, the winning determination result command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, when the start port buffer value is "1", the transmission setting by the process of S213 shown in FIG. 18 is performed, so that the first hold storage number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. NS.

When a game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting winning (second starting winning) occurs, it is shown in FIG. The second start condition is satisfied when it is determined in the process of S205 that the second special figure reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value. The second start condition is a condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. When the second start condition is satisfied, the start port buffer value is set to "2" in the process of S206 shown in FIG. 4, and then the transmission setting is made by the process of S211 to move from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. On the other hand, the second start opening winning designation command is transmitted. Further, by setting the transmission by the process of S408 shown in FIG. 19, the winning determination result command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing the transmission setting by the process of S213 shown in FIG. NS.

On the side of the effect control board 12, the establishment of the first starting condition can be detected by receiving the first start opening winning designation command, and the establishment of the second starting condition can be detected by receiving the second starting opening winning designation command. can. As described above, the first start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying the establishment of the first start condition. The second start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying the establishment of the second start condition. The winning determination result command is the first start winning, which is the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening, or the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening. At the time of the second start winning, the comparison result (winning judgment result) using the game random number (random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result) extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like is sent to the effect control board 12 side. Notify. The first reserved storage number notification command notifies the first special figure reserved storage number. The second reserved storage number notification command notifies the second special figure reserved storage number. In this embodiment, in the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, the game ball passes (enters) either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, and the starting winning is won. In addition to notifying whether the occurrence has occurred, it is transmitted as hold notification information for specifying which of the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number has increased.

The first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command correspond to the start of execution of the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. May be sent. Alternatively, when the number of reserved storages increases, the 1st special figure reserved storage number or the 2nd special figure reserved storage number increases, and the reserved storage number addition designation command (1st reserved storage number addition designation command or 2nd While sending the hold storage number addition specification command), when the hold storage number decreases, the hold storage number subtraction specification command (No. 1) indicates that the hold storage number of the first special figure or the second special figure hold storage number has decreased. 1) Hold storage number subtraction designation command or second hold storage number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted. A total hold memory notification command that notifies the total hold memory in place of the first hold memory notification command or the second hold memory notification command, or together with the first hold memory notification command or the second hold memory notification command. May be sent. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

FIG. 21B illustrates the content of the notification by the winning determination result command. Of the winning determination result commands shown in FIG. 21B, the command C402H, command C403H, and command C404H may be transmitted when the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is not within the jackpot determination range. , The variable display result is determined to be "missing", and the winning judgment result that the jackpot game state is not controlled is notified. On the other hand, the command C401H is transmitted when the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the jackpot determination range, and the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" and controlled to the jackpot gaming state at the time of winning. Notify the judgment result (variable display content is "big hit"). The command C402H is transmitted when the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the super reach confirmation range at the time of loss, and the determination result at the time of winning (variable display content) that the fluctuation pattern with super reach is determined at the time of loss. Will notify you of "Super reach confirmed at the time of loss"). The command C403H is transmitted when the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the reach confirmation range at the time of loss, and the determination result at the time of winning (the variable display content is determined to be the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect at the time of loss). "Reach confirmed when lost") is notified. The command C404H is transmitted when the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is neither within the super reach confirmation range at the time of loss nor within the reach confirmation range, and at the time of winning that the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect may not be determined. Notify the judgment result (variable display content is "general when lost"). In this way, the winning judgment result command uses the game random numbers extracted at the time of starting winning to determine whether or not the variable display result is determined as a "big hit" or whether or not it is determined in a specific fluctuation pattern. It is transmitted as judgment result information for notifying the judgment result at the time of winning.

The special symbol normal processing of S110 shown in FIG. 17 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A or The second special symbol display device 4B determines whether or not to start the special symbol game. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, the variable display result determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. Derived Determined (predetermined) before being displayed. At this time, if the variable display result is determined to be "big hit", the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types. The jackpot type is stored by storing the data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer provided in the predetermined area (for example, the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, the fixed special symbol (big hit symbol,) in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B corresponds to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Any of the lost symbols) is set. In the special symbol normal processing, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

The variation pattern setting process of S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types based on a pre-determination result of whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit". The variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set in advance according to the variable pattern. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, the variable display time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the derivation of the finalized special symbol that is the variable display result is determined. Further, the variable pattern setting process may include a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to "reach" when the variable display result is "missing". Alternatively, even if it is determined whether or not to set the variable display state of the decorative symbol to "reach" by determining the variation pattern when the variable display result becomes "missing" in the variation pattern setting process at a predetermined ratio. good. Further, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of setting the special symbol display device 4 to start the variation of the special symbol. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

The special symbol variation process of S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process of setting the special symbol to be varied in the special symbol display device 4, a process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol, and the like. .. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop processing of S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. This special symbol stop process includes a process of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special symbol display device 4 and setting to stop and display the confirmed special symbol which is the variable display result of the special symbol. When the finalized special symbol is stopped and displayed, a setting for transmitting the symbol finalized command to the effect control board 12 is made as an effect control command that can specify that the display result in the variable display is derived. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the predetermined area (for example, the game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the hit start specification command that specifies the start of the jackpot game state based on the special figure display result being "big hit" is set to be transmitted, and the value of the special figure process flag is set to ". Update to 4 ”. If the jackpot flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The jackpot opening preprocessing of S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In this big hit pre-opening process, based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit", etc., the process of starting the execution of the round game in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening to be in the open state, etc. It is included. When the jackpot release preprocessing is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The process of opening the jackpot in S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6".

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this jackpot opening post-processing, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game in which the jackpot is open has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "2" or "15" depending on the jackpot type). Processing to be performed, processing to wait until the next round game is started when the maximum number of times has not been reached, and the like are included. Then, when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4", while when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is "7". Is updated to.

The jackpot end processing of S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end processing, a waiting period corresponding to a period in which the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by an effect device such as an image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. It includes a process of waiting until the time elapses and a process of making various settings for controlling the probabilistic state and the time saving state according to the success or failure of the probabilistic control condition. Then, when the setting for controlling the probability change state or the time saving state is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 17 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 22, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure hold storage number is “0” (S231). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. The CPU 103 may read the second hold storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

When the number of the second special figure reserved storage is other than "0" in S231 (S231; No), it is stored in the head area (storage area corresponding to the hold number "1") of the second special figure reserved storage unit. Numerical data indicating a predetermined random value is read out as the pending data (S232). As a result, the game random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start prize (second start prize) at the second start prize opening in the process of S209 shown in FIG. 18 are read out. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the processing of S232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved storage number count value and updating, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the second special figure reserved storage unit is updated. (S233). For example, the reserved data stored in the storage area lower than the reserved number "1" (the storage area corresponding to the reserved numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reserved storage unit is placed one entry higher. shift. Further, in the process of S233, the total number of reserved storages may be updated to be subtracted by 1. Then, the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the storage value of the variation special figure designation buffer provided in the predetermined area (game control buffer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 102, is updated to "2" (S234).

When the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in S231 (S231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (S235). The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The CPU 103 may read the first hold storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is "0". As described above, the process of S235 is executed when it is determined in S231 that the number of reserved second special figures is "0", and whether or not the number of reserved first special figures is "0". Is determined. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, when the special figure game is executed in the order in which the game balls pass (enter) the start winning opening regardless of whether it is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the first The start port data indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) through the start winning opening or the second starting winning opening is associated with the hold number in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 together with the hold data or separately from the hold data. It suffices to make it possible to specify the order in which the start conditions are satisfied for the special figure game corresponding to each reserved data.

Following the processing of S236, for example, by subtracting 1 from the first reserved storage number count value and updating, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the first special figure reserved storage unit is updated. (S237). For example, the reserved data stored in the storage area lower than the reserved number "1" (the storage area corresponding to the reserved numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reserved storage unit is placed one entry higher. shift. Further, in the process of S237, the total number of reserved storages may be updated to be subtracted by 1. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (S238).

After executing any of the processes of S234 and S238, the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is determined to be either "big hit" or "miss" (S239). As an example, in the process of S239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of ROM 101 in advance is selected and set as a table used for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "loss". , Should be assigned. The CPU 103 may determine the special figure display result by referring to the special figure display result determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read from the random number buffer for variation. When the special symbol display result is determined to be "big hit" in the processing of S239, the display result of the special symbol derived in the special symbol game becomes the jackpot symbol as the specific display result, and the decorative symbol is variably displayed. After the display result derived in the above becomes a definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. In this way, by executing the process of S239 by the CPU 103, it is possible to determine whether or not to control the player in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

In the processing of S239, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probabilistic state and the probabilistic change control is performed, the special figure is displayed at a higher rate than when the probabilistic change control is not performed in the normal state or the time saving state. The result is decided as a "big hit". The probabilistic change state is started by setting the probabilistic change flag to the on state corresponding to the case where the big hit type is either "probability change" or "probability change" by, for example, the big hit end process of S117 shown in FIG. NS. In the probabilistic state, the special figure display result is more likely to be a "big hit" and the big hit game state is more likely to occur than when the probabilistic change control is not performed in the normal state or the time saving state.

The CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined by the process of S239 is a "big hit" (S240). When the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" (S240; Yes), the big hit flag provided in a predetermined area (game control flag setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102 is set to the on state (S241). Further, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (S242). As an example, in the process of S242, a jackpot type determination table prepared in advance by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 is selected and set as a table used for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value for determining the jackpot type, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, has a plurality of jackpot types. It suffices if it is assigned to the decision result of which type to use. The CPU 103 may determine the jackpot type by referring to the jackpot type determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type read from the variable random number buffer.

After executing the process of S242, the jackpot type is stored (S243). The CPU 103 may store the jackpot type by storing data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area (game control buffer setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102.

When the special symbol display result is not "big hit" in S240 (S240; No), or after the processing of S243 is executed, a definite special symbol which is a variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game is determined (S244). ). As an example, when it is determined in S240 that the special symbol display result is not a "big hit", a special symbol predetermined as a lost symbol is determined as a final special symbol. On the other hand, when it is determined in S240 that the special figure display result is "big hit", one of the special symbols predetermined as a plurality of types of big hit symbols is selected according to the determination result of the big hit type in S242. It may be decided as a definite special symbol.

After executing the process of S244, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1" (S245), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "1" in S245, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the fluctuation pattern setting process of S111 shown in FIG. 17 is executed.

If the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in S235 (S235; Yes), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (S246), the special symbol normal processing is performed. finish. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed to the board 12. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S111 of FIG. 17 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 23, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (S261). Then, when the big hit flag is on (S261; Yes), the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is "big hit" is determined (S262). On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (S261; No), the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the loss when the special figure display result becomes "loss" is determined (S263).

In the process of S262, the fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined by using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of ROM 101, for example. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern. The CPU 103 corresponds to the case where the variable display result becomes "big hit" by referring to the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern read from the random number buffer for fluctuation. The fluctuation pattern may be determined. Further, in the process of S263, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined by using the loss fluctuation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of ROM 101, for example. In the loss fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern. The CPU 103 corresponds to the case where the variable display result becomes "miss" by referring to the loss fluctuation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern read from the random number buffer for fluctuation. The fluctuation pattern may be determined.

FIG. 24 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result (special figure display result) is "missing", the variable display state of the decorative symbol is "non-reach", which is not the reach state, and "the reach state". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the case of "reach" and the case where the variable display result (special figure display result) is "big hit". The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display content is "non-reach" is called a non-reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display content is "reach" is , It is called a reach fluctuation pattern (also called a reach loss fluctuation pattern). The non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “loss”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect in the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect in the super reach is executed.

FIG. 25 shows an example of determining a jackpot fluctuation pattern and a loss fluctuation pattern. In the process of S262 shown in FIG. 23, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined at a ratio as shown in FIG. 25 (A), for example. In the example shown in FIG. 25 (A), as the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit, any one of the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 to the fluctuation pattern PA3-3 and the fluctuation pattern PB3-1 to the fluctuation pattern PB3-4 is used at a predetermined ratio. Will be decided. In the process of S263 shown in FIG. 23, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined at a ratio as shown in FIG. 25 (B1), for example, in the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed. Further, in the process of S263 shown in FIG. 23, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined at a ratio as shown in FIG. 25 (B2), for example, when the time saving control is being performed during the time saving. In the process of S263, by determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss, when the variable display result becomes "loss", it is determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state. It should be noted that, by a process separate from the determination of the fluctuation pattern, it may be determined whether or not to reach the reach state when the variable display result becomes "missing".

In the example shown in FIG. 25 (A), the determined value assigned to the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect in the super reach, such as the fluctuation pattern PB3-1 to the fluctuation pattern PB3-4, is the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 to the fluctuation pattern. It is set to be larger than the determined value assigned to the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect in the normal reach such as PA3-3. On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 25 (B1) and 25 (B2), the determined values assigned to the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the reach effect in the normal reach, such as the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 to the fluctuation pattern PA2-3, fluctuate. It is set to be larger than the determined value assigned to the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect in the super reach, such as the pattern PB2-1 to the fluctuation pattern PB2-4. As a result, when the variable display result is derived after the reach effect in the super reach is executed, the possibility that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" (big hit expectation) is increased.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 25 (B1), determination values assigned to different fluctuation patterns are included depending on whether the number of reserved first special figures is 0, 1, or 2 or more. As a specific example, the determined value in the range of "151" to "180" is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 if the number of stored first special figures is 0, and the number of stored stored first special figures is 1. If, it is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA1-2, and if the number of stored first special figures is 2 or more, it is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA1-3. With such a setting, the average variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol can be changed according to the number of the first special symbol reserved storages. In particular, when the number of reserved first special figures is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, "2"), the average variable display time should be shorter than when the number of reserved first special figures is less than a predetermined value. It is sufficient that a determination value is assigned to each fluctuation pattern so that In the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed, it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) through the second start winning opening, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the second special figure is low. Therefore, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the first special figure reserved storage number is a predetermined value (for example, "0") regardless of the second special figure reserved storage number. The fluctuation pattern may be determined with reference to the same table data as in. Alternatively, regardless of the number of the second special figure reserved storage when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the table data corresponding to the first special figure reserved storage number at that time is referred to. , The fluctuation pattern may be determined. Alternatively, in response to the fact that the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, FIG. 25 ( The fluctuation pattern may be determined by referring to the table data to which the determination value is assigned differently from B1). Alternatively, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the "first special figure reserved storage number" shown in FIG. 25 (B1) is read as "the second special figure reserved storage number". The fluctuation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data according to the number of reserved storages in the second special figure.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 25 (B2), a determination value assigned to a different variation pattern is included depending on whether the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is 0, 1, or 2 or more. With such a setting, the average variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol can be changed according to the number of the second special symbol reserved storage. In particular, when the number of reserved second special figures is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, "2"), the average variable display time should be shorter than when the number of reserved second special figures is less than a predetermined value. It is sufficient that a determination value is assigned to each fluctuation pattern so that During the time reduction control, the game ball easily passes (enters) the second start winning opening, and the special figure game using the second special figure is frequently executed. When the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, the special figure game using the second special figure is repeated if the time is shortened. There is a high possibility that it will be executed, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the first special figure is low. Then, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the number of stored second special figures is 0. Therefore, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the second special figure reserved storage number is a predetermined value (for example, "0") regardless of the first special figure reserved storage number. The fluctuation pattern may be determined with reference to the same table data as in. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined by referring to the table data in which the allocation of the determination values is different from that in FIG. 25 (B2) regardless of the number of the first special figure reserved storage. Alternatively, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the "second special figure reserved storage number" shown in FIG. 25 (B2) is read as "the first special figure reserved storage number". The fluctuation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data according to the number of reserved storages in the first special figure.

After executing any of the processes of S262 and S263, the special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is set (S264). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is derived and displayed. Is. As shown in FIG. 24, the special figure fluctuation time is predetermined in accordance with a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. Therefore, the special figure fluctuation time is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern in the processing of S262 and S263. By setting the special symbol fluctuation time, the CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived.

Following the process of S264, the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. Is set to start the fluctuation of the special symbol so as to start any of the special symbol games in which is established (S265). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

After executing the process of S265, the command transmission setting at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol is performed (S266). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives the first fluctuation start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, and the first from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the hold storage number notification commands, the storage address (start address) in ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is specified. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives a second fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, and a second from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the hold storage number notification commands, the storage address in ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is specified.

The first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command use the fluctuation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. This is an effect control command that specifies the start of fluctuation in the special figure game. The first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command are also simply referred to as fluctuation start commands. The variable pattern specification command is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is an effect control command that specifies a variation pattern such as a decorative pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol.

After executing the process of S266, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2" (S267), and then the variation pattern setting process is terminated. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" in S267, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the special symbol variation process of S112 shown in FIG. 17 is executed.

Next, the operation on the effect control board 12 will be described.

When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process shown in FIG. 26. When the effect control main process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (S51), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and CTC (counter) mounted on the effect control board 12. / Timer circuit) register settings, etc. After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (S52). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (S52; No), it waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, a control signal that serves as an effect control command is selected from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. To capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

When the timer interrupt flag is on (S52; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to turn it off, and the command analysis process is executed (S54). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

As an example, in the command analysis process, when there is a receive command stored in the effect control command reception buffer, it is determined which effect control command is received by checking the MODE data of the receive command. .. At this time, when the winning determination result command and the first reserved storage number notification command are received together with the first starting port winning designation command, the first set provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control buffer setting unit) or the like. Among the free areas in the start winning command buffer, the first starting opening winning designation command and the first holding storage number notification command are sequentially stored in the storage area having the smallest hold display number as the buffer number. On the other hand, when the second hold storage number notification command is received together with the second start opening prize designation command, the free area in the second start prize command buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control buffer setting unit) or the like Among them, the second start opening winning designation command and the second hold storage number notification command are stored in order in the storage area having the smallest hold display number as the buffer number.

The command buffer at the time of the first start winning is associated with a set of effect control commands (first start opening winning designation command and first hold storage number notification command) transmitted in response to the occurrence of the first start winning. A storage area is reserved so that it can be stored. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control commands received when the first start prize occurs in the storage areas corresponding to the hold display numbers "1" to "4" of the command buffer at the time of the first start prize according to the reception order. Store in order from the beginning of the free area in. The hold display number in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning is corresponding to the number of hold storages of the first special figure.

The command buffer at the time of the second start winning is associated with a set of effect control commands (second start opening winning designation command and second hold storage number notification command) transmitted in response to the occurrence of the second start winning. A storage area is reserved so that it can be stored. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control commands received when the second start prize occurs in the storage areas corresponding to the hold display numbers "1" to "4" of the command buffer at the time of the second start prize according to the reception order. Store in order from the beginning of the free area in. The hold display number in the command buffer at the time of winning the second start corresponds to the number of hold storages of the second special figure.

After executing the command analysis process, the effect control process process is executed (S55). In the effect control process process, various operations such as display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting operation in the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the like. Regarding the control content of the effect operation using the effect device, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11. Following the effect control process process, the effect random number update process is executed (S56), and the numerical data indicating the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the RAM 122 is updated by the software as various random number values used for the effect control. do.

Subsequently, when an abnormality notification command included in the effect control command is received from the main board 11, an error notification process (S57) for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality is executed in response to the command. In the error notification process, for example, under the control of the effect control CPU 120, an error image for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Output it. After executing the error notification process, the process returns to S52.

As shown in FIG. 31 (D1) described later, the error image may be displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 (full screen display), or may be displayed in FIG. 31 (D2). As shown, it may be displayed in a part of the display area of the image display device 5 (partial display). Further, for example, when the abnormality notification command indicates an abnormality winning, an error image is displayed in a full-screen display mode, and the abnormality notification command is a ball removal error (the game ball stored in the lower plate sets the specified amount. The display mode of the error image may be changed according to the type (severity) of the error, such as displaying in the partial display mode when indicating (error when the error is exceeded).

In this embodiment, the error image is not erased from the image display device 5 until the error indicated by the abnormality notification command is resolved. Therefore, the error image is not erased even during the derivation display of the variable display result (see FIG. 31 (D2)), and the display of the error image is prioritized over the display of the adjustment result image R described later. .. Further, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the volume as an effect can be adjusted by the operation of the player, but the error sound cannot be adjusted with the default setting. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player or the game store clerk from noticing the occurrence of the error even though some error has occurred.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 27, first, the change effect character display process is executed (S162). The change effect character display process is for displaying an effect image showing a character in the hold display change common effect on the screen of the image display device 5 based on a setting according to a decision result of executing the hold display change effect. Includes processing. Further, the character display process for changing effect is a process of determining whether or not a variation start command (first variation start command or second variation start command) or a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received, and these. It includes processing for controlling the display of the effect image showing the character according to the determination result of.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the change effect character display process executed in S162 of FIG. 27. In the change effect character display process shown in FIG. 28, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the character is being displayed (S601). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the character is being displayed when the effect image showing the character CH1 (character for change effect) shown in FIG. 29 (B) used in the hold display change common effect is displayed. Just do it.

If the character is not being displayed in S601 (S601; No), it is determined whether or not there is a change effect setting (S602). For example, if the effect control CPU 120 specifies the stored contents of the hold display change pattern and the change effect timing pattern in the hold display data storage unit and stores the information corresponding to the decision result of executing the hold display change effect, the effect control CPU 120 stores the information corresponding to the decision result of executing the hold display change effect. It may be determined that there is a change effect setting. If there is no change effect setting (S602; No), the change effect character display process ends.

If there is a change effect setting in S602 (S602; Yes), after controlling to start displaying the effect image indicating the change effect character on the screen of the image display device 5 (S603), The character display process for change effect is terminated. In the process of S603, the effect control CPU 120 may change the display mode of the change effect character depending on the determination result of whether or not the decorative symbol is being variably displayed. Whether or not the decorative symbol is being variably displayed may be specified from the value of the effect process flag provided in a predetermined area (effect control flag setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122. More specifically, when the value of the effect process flag is "2", it may be determined that the decorative pattern is being variably displayed. On the other hand, when the value of the effect process flag is other than "2", it may be determined that the decorative symbol is not being variablely displayed. When it is determined that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed, a display control command instructing that the display mode of the change effect character is set as the action mode is output to, for example, the VDP of the display control unit 123. On the other hand, when it is determined that the decorative symbol is not in the variable display, a display control command instructing that the display mode of the change effect character is set to the stationary mode is output to, for example, the VDP of the display control unit 123.

The action mode is the display position, size, rotation amount, movement direction, movement speed, movement amount of the change effect character, or a part of the shape, pattern, or color of the change effect character according to the animation pattern prepared in advance. All may be a display mode of a change display (operation display) that changes with the passage of time. The change of the change effect character according to the animation pattern may be repeated at a predetermined cycle. In contrast to such an action mode, the stationary mode may be any display mode in which the character for changing effect does not change with the passage of time. In contrast to the stationary mode, the action mode is also referred to as a non-stationary mode or a behavioral mode.

The effect image showing the change effect character whose display is started by executing the process of S603 is a character used in the action effect in the hold display change effect (for example, the character CH1 as shown in FIG. 29B). It is an image showing. By executing the process of S603, the display of the effect image showing the change effect character can be started even before the variable display in which the hold display change effect is executed is started. In this case, the effect image showing the change effect character can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 over a plurality of variable displays.

When the character is being displayed in S601 (S601; Yes), it is determined whether or not the display end timing is set in advance (S604). The display end timing is, for example, when the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, when the execution of the reach effect in the super reach is started, or when the execution of the hold display change effect by the hold display change pattern is completed. Any timing may be sufficient as long as the display end condition of the predetermined change effect character such as any of them is satisfied. When the display end timing is reached (S604; Yes), the effect image indicating the character CH1 to be the change effect character is controlled to end the display on the screen of the image display device 5 (S605), and then the change is performed. The effect character display process is terminated.

If it is not the variation end timing (S604; No), it is determined whether or not the variation start command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (S606). In the process of S606, when either the first fluctuation start command or the second fluctuation start command is received, it may be determined that the fluctuation start command has been received. When the variation start command is received (S606; Yes), the setting to start the variable display control is made (S607), and then the change effect character display process is terminated. In the process of S607, for example, in the process of S603, the display control command for instructing that the display mode of the change effect character is set to the action mode is displayed and controlled, as in the case where it is determined that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed. It may be output to the VDP of the unit 123. As a result, the display mode of the effect image showing the change effect character can be changed to the action mode, triggered by the reception of the variation start command that can specify the start of the variable display.

If the fluctuation start command is not received in S606 (S606; No), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 is received (S608). If the symbol confirmation command is not received (S608; No), the change effect character display process is terminated. On the other hand, when the symbol confirmation command is received (S608; Yes), the setting to start the symbol confirmation display control is made (S609), and then the change effect character display process is terminated. In the process of S609, for example, in the process of S603, the display control command for instructing that the display mode of the change effect character is set to the stationary mode is displayed and controlled, as in the case where it is determined that the decorative symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner. It may be output to the VDP of the unit 123. Thereby, during the period in which the display result in the variable display is derived, the display mode of the effect image showing the change effect character can be changed to the stationary mode.

FIG. 29 shows an example of specific settings for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. 29A shows a configuration example of a Z value setting table that assigns Z values to a plurality of display layers. FIG. 29B shows an arrangement example of each display layer based on the Z value setting by the Z value setting table. In this embodiment, the plurality of layers include an error display layer, a small symbol display layer, an adjustment result image display layer, a full screen notice display layer, a change effect display layer, a decorative design display layer, and a design notice display layer. ing. An effect image of error display is drawn on the error display layer. On the small symbol display layer, an effect image showing a small symbol that is variably displayed in the small symbol display area 5V is drawn. When the volume is adjusted, the adjustment result image R showing the volume adjustment result is drawn on the adjustment result image display layer. An image of the full-screen notice display used in the full-screen notice effect is drawn on the full-screen notice display layer. On the change effect display layer, an effect image showing a character or the like used in the hold display change effect is drawn. On the decorative symbol display layer, an effect image showing a decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" is drawn. An image of the symbol advance notice display used in the symbol advance notice effect is drawn on the symbol advance notice display layer. The image of the symbol notice display may be a notice display related to the decorative symbol, and in this embodiment, the image G is located around the decorative symbol and has a display mode such as an aura (halo) of the decorative symbol. It is said. In the image data of the effect images drawn on each display layer, a Z value, which is a depth value used when each effect image is superimposed and drawn, is set. By setting the Z value using the Z value setting table as shown in FIG. 15 (A), an error display layer, a small symbol display layer, an adjustment result image display layer, a full-screen notice display layer, a change effect display layer, and a decorative symbol display layer. The Z value of the effect image drawn on each of the symbol advance notice display layers is different depending on the display layer on which the effect image is drawn.

For example, the VDP of the display control unit 123 may determine the priority by performing a Z value comparison operation when writing the image data read from the CGROM to the frame buffer of the VRAM or the like. Then, the image data of the effect image having a small Z value is written to the frame buffer with priority over the image data of the effect image having a large Z value. As a result, the effect image drawn on the display layer to which the small value as the Z value is assigned has a higher priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer to which the large value as the Z value is assigned, and is forward from the player's point of view. Can be placed on the side.

As shown in FIG. 29 (B), the error image display layer has the priority of the error image (see FIGS. 31 (D1) and (D2)) by setting the Z value so as to be arranged on the frontmost side. Is made higher than other production images. Further, the Z value is set so that the small symbol display layer is arranged on the front side next to the error display layer when viewed from the player. Therefore, even when a display effect is executed by displaying an arbitrary effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 5V is always performed as long as it does not overlap with the error image. It becomes visible to the player. Further, the Z value is set so that the adjustment result image display layer is arranged on the front side next to the small symbol display layer. As a result, the adjustment result image R showing the volume adjustment result can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the full-screen notice display image, the effect image showing the decorative pattern, and the like. Further, the Z value is set so that the full-screen notice display layer is arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display layer. As a result, the full-screen notice image used in the full-screen notice effect can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern can be hidden. The Z value may be set so that the full-screen notice display layer is arranged in front of the adjustment result image display layer. Further, although the change effect display layer is on the rear side of the small symbol display layer, the Z value is set so as to be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display layer. As a result, the effect image used in the hold display change effect can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing the decorative pattern. In this way, the effect image showing the change effect character can be arranged at overlapping positions on the front side of the effect image showing the decorative pattern to be the identification information image. Further, the Z value is set so that the symbol notice display layer is arranged next to the decorative symbol display layer. As a result, the symbol preview image used in the symbol preview effect can be arranged at an overlapping position on the rear side of the effect image showing the decorative symbol, and a display for decorating the decorative symbol from behind (for example, an aura display of the decorative symbol). )It can be performed.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect effect setting process executed in S163 of FIG. 27. In this embodiment, by executing the effect setting process described below, during the game (see FIGS. 31 (A1) and 31) and during the customer waiting demonstration display (see FIG. 31 (B)). The volume as an effect can be adjusted by the player's adjustment operation. When the volume is adjusted, the adjustment result image R showing the volume adjustment result is displayed in a predetermined area of the image display device 5 in a manner superimposed on the effect image and the demo image. As shown in FIGS. 31 (A1), (A2), (B), (C2), and the like, the adjustment result image R is displayed, for example, in a bar graph display mode in which the adjustment result image R increases or decreases in the left-right direction. The mode of the adjustment result image R is arbitrary as long as the player or the like can recognize the current volume, and may be a mode of displaying numerical values or characters corresponding to the volume, a pie chart mode, or the like.

In this embodiment, in the menu mode, the item of "volume adjustment" is selected from the menu screen (see FIG. 31 (C1)) and the volume adjustment mode is selected (see FIG. 31 (C2)). The volume can be adjusted only when it is turned on. While the volume adjustment mode is selected, the adjustment result image R is always displayed. Further, as will be described later, in response to the reception of a predetermined operation during the customer waiting demo display, the mode shifts from the customer waiting demo display to the menu mode.

When the effect setting process shown in FIG. 30 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the menu mode is being executed (S701). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the menu mode is being executed if the menu mode execution flag is on, and determines that the menu mode is not being executed if it is off. The menu mode execution flag is set to the on state in S662 described later, and cleared to the off state in S661 (see FIG. 33).

When the menu mode is not being executed (S701; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the adjustment result image display displaying flag is in the ON state (S702). The adjustment result image display flag is set to the on state in S708 and S715 described later, and cleared to the off state in S704 and S712.

When the adjustment result image display flag is on (S702; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined predetermined period T1 has elapsed from the time when the adjustment operation is received (S703). Here, the adjustment operation (adjustment operation) is an operation performed by the player using an operation means such as a stick controller 31A, and in this embodiment, it is an operation for adjusting the volume as an effect. .. For example, the player tilts the stick controller 31A to the left or right to adjust the volume from a predetermined range (for example, 6 steps from 1 to 6), and the volume at the time when the tilt operation is stopped is increased. It is determined as the volume as the adjustment result.

The volume determination operation may be performed by pressing and pulling the trigger button of the stick controller 31A or pressing and pulling the push button 31B separately from the adjustment operation. Further, the operating means for adjusting the volume is not limited to the stick controller 31A, and may be a cross-shaped button or a dial-type operating means (not shown). Further, instead of the operating means, a non-contact type sensor (for example, a photo sensor) may be used, and the effect can be adjusted by the adjustment operation of the player detected by the sensor.

The predetermined period T1 is predetermined as a display period of the adjustment result image R indicating the volume adjustment result. The predetermined period T1 is arbitrary as long as it is an appropriate period for the player to confirm the adjustment result, and in this embodiment, it is set to about several seconds (for example, 2 to 10 seconds). Whether or not the predetermined period T1 has elapsed from the time when the adjustment operation is received corresponds to the predetermined period T1 in the predetermined timer, for example, when it is determined in S706 described later that there is an adjustment operation (S706; Yes). You can set the value and determine if the timer has timed out.

The adjustment operation (adjustment operation) may be an operation for adjusting the display brightness (light intensity) of the image display device 5 or the effect effect lamp as the effect. The adjustment result image R may show the brightness adjustment result. Further, it is sufficient that at least one of the volume and the brightness can be adjusted according to the adjustment operation. Further, the predetermined period in which the adjustment result image according to the volume is displayed and the predetermined period in which the adjustment result image according to the brightness is displayed may be set to the same length or different lengths. It may have been done.

In S703, when the predetermined period T1 has elapsed from the reception of the adjustment operation (S703; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 erases the adjustment result image R from the image display device 5 and turns off the adjustment result image display flag. Clear to the state (S704). By the process of S704, when the game is being played or the demo is being displayed, the adjustment result image R is deleted when the predetermined period T1 elapses from the adjustment operation. Following the process of S704, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of S706. Further, even when a No determination is made in the processing of S702 or S703, the processing of S706 is executed.

In S701, if the menu mode is being executed (S701; Yes), and if the volume adjustment mode is being selected (S705; Yes), the process of S706 is executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the volume adjustment mode is being selected if the volume adjustment mode selection flag is on, and determines that the volume adjustment mode is not being selected if it is off. The volume adjustment mode selecting flag is set to the on state in S664 described later, and is cleared to the off state in a predetermined case. For example, when a mode other than volume adjustment is selected during menu mode execution, or when the menu mode execution flag is turned off, the volume adjustment mode selection flag is cleared to the off state. Further, when the volume adjustment mode is selected (S705; Yes), the adjustment result image R is always displayed without going through the processing of S704. Further, even during the demo display, the adjustment result image R may not be erased even after the lapse of the predetermined period T1. Even if the menu mode is being executed (S701; Yes), if the volume adjustment mode is not selected (S705; No), the effect setting process is terminated.

In S706, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there has been an adjustment operation. When, for example, an operation signal from the stick controller 31A (for example, an operation signal indicating a tilting operation in the left-right direction) is input, the effect control CPU 120 determines that there is an adjustment operation (S706; Yes), and performs the adjustment operation. The corresponding volume setting value is stored in the setting value storage area provided in the RAM 122 (S707). Even in the processing of S707, the volume setting value for the error sound stored in the setting value storage area provided in the RAM 122 is not changed and remains as the initial setting value.

Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the adjustment result image R that notifies the volume setting value according to the adjustment operation, and sets the adjustment result image display in-display flag to the ON state (S708). If the adjustment result image R is already being displayed (when the processing changes to Yes in S702, No in S703, and Yes in S706), the adjustment result image that notifies the volume setting value according to the current adjustment operation. R is displayed on the image display device 5 (updated from the adjustment result image R according to the previous adjustment operation), and the adjustment result image display flag is kept on.

After executing the process of S708, or when it is determined that there is no adjustment operation in the process of S706 (S706; No), the process of S710 is executed.

In S710, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display result derivation display period T2 (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “deriving display period”) is set. For example, the effect control CPU 120 is turned on when the process of completely stopping display (deriving display) of the final stop symbol as the final stop symbol, which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol, is started in the variable display effect process described later. Based on the flag that is set to and cleared to the off state when the processing is completed, it is determined whether or not the derivation display period T2 is reached. The derived display period T2 corresponds to the display period of the final stop symbol, which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol, and is set to about several seconds (for example, 0.5 to 1 second). Therefore, in this embodiment, the derivation display period T2 is shorter than the predetermined period T1 described above. The derivation display period T2 does not have to be constant, and may be set so that it is shorter in the time saving state than in the normal state, for example.

When the derivation display period T2 of the variable display result is (S710; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the adjustment result image display flag is on (S711), and if it is on (S711; Yes). Yes), the adjustment result image R is erased, and the adjustment result image display flag is cleared to the off state (S712). As a result, even if the predetermined period T1 has not elapsed from the adjustment operation, the adjustment result image R is deleted if the derivation display period T2 (see FIGS. 32 (A) and 32 (B) described later).

On the other hand, when the derivation display period T2 of the variable display result is not set (S710; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the adjustment result image display flag is on (S713). If it is off, that is, if the adjustment result image R is not displayed (S713; No), the process of S714 is executed.

In the process of S714, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display derivation display period T2 has elapsed and is within the predetermined period T1 (whether or not the predetermined period T1 has not elapsed). When the derivation display period T2 has elapsed and is within the predetermined period T1 (S714; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 returns the adjustment result image R (displays again) and turns on the adjustment result image display flag. Set to the state (S715). As a result, even if the adjustment result image R is erased by the processing of S712, it is not the derived display period T2 (S710; No), but the derived display period T2 has elapsed but is within the predetermined period T1 (S714; Yes). ), As shown in FIG. 32 (B), the adjustment result image R is restored and displayed.

When the determination is Yes in S713, the determination is No in S705, S711, and S714, and after the execution of S712 and S715, the effect control CPU 120 ends the effect setting process.

If the adjustment result image R is erased in the derivation display period T2, the adjustment operation is invalidated or the volume setting corresponding to the adjustment operation is invalidated without going through the processing of S706 or S707. You may. Further, the volume setting value stored in the setting value storage area provided in the RAM 122 may be configured to return to the default (initial setting value) at a predetermined timing. The predetermined timing may be, for example, after a specific change, after executing the change a specific number of times, when the customer waiting demo display is returned, or when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted. Further, a plurality of types of predetermined periods T1 having different lengths are prepared, and may be used properly for each gaming state, for example. For example, the predetermined period may be set to 10 seconds in the time saving state, and the predetermined period may be set to 5 seconds in the normal state.

Here, a main example when the adjustment result image R is erased during the derivation display period T2 will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 32 (A) and 32 (B). As shown in FIGS. 32 (A) and 32 (B), the predetermined period T1 becomes the display period of the adjustment result image R from the time when the latest adjustment operation is performed, but at least a part of the predetermined period T1 and the derived display period T2. If they overlap, the adjustment result image R is erased (corresponding to S712). In the example shown in FIG. 32 (A), the derivation display period T2 overlaps with the rear end portion of the predetermined period T1. In this case, the adjustment result image R is not displayed until the next adjustment operation is performed. On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 32B is a case where the derivation display period T2 is within the predetermined period T1. In this case, when the derivation display period T2 ends, the adjustment result image R is displayed again (in S715). (Equivalent), the display is continued until the predetermined period T1 elapses. Although not shown, when the derivation display period T2 overlaps with the front end portion of the predetermined period T1, the adjustment result image R is displayed after waiting for the end of the derivation display period T2. As described above, according to this embodiment, since the adjustment result image R is erased in the derivation display period T2, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the derivation display variable display result.

FIG. 31 (A1) is a display example of the adjustment result image R during the game. During the game, the adjustment result image R is displayed at the lower right end of the image display device 5. Then, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31 (A1), the display area of the adjustment result image R is the display area Ar of the decorative symbol (the area including the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). It overlaps with a part of. Further, FIG. 31 (A2) is a display example of the adjustment result image R especially during the full-screen notice, and the adjustment result image R is displayed overlapping on the full-screen notice display. The adjustment result image R may not be displayed during the full screen notice. If the adjustment result image R is displayed during such an effect period, the interest of the full-screen notice effect may be reduced. Therefore, the adjustment result image R may not be displayed during the full-screen notice, but may be adjustable or displayed. And adjustment may not be possible.

FIG. 31B is a display example of the adjustment result image R during the demo display (during the customer waiting demonstration display). During the demo display, as shown in the figure, an image indicating that a customer waiting demonstration is being performed, such as "demo display", is displayed on the image display device 5, and when an adjustment operation is performed, an image is displayed. , The adjustment result image R is superimposed and displayed on the demo display image.

FIG. 31 (C1) is a display example of the menu screen in the menu mode. In this embodiment, in the menu mode, the player performs a volume adjustment mode selection operation, and the volume can be adjusted only when the screen is switched to the volume adjustment mode selection screen shown in FIG. 31 (C2). It has become. Items in the menu mode can be selected, for example, by tilting the stick controller 31A. With the "volume adjustment" item selected, the trigger button of the stick controller 31A can be pushed and pulled, or the push button 31B can be pressed. By pressing the button, the screen transitions to the screen during which the volume adjustment mode is selected as shown in FIG. 31 (C2). The operation means for selecting an item is not limited to the stick controller 31A, and may be a cross button (not shown) or the like. The display mode of the adjustment result image R may be different between the game shown in FIGS. 31 (A1) and 31 (A2) and the volume adjustment mode selected shown in FIG. 31 (C2). For example, when the volume adjustment mode is selected, the adjustment result image R may be displayed larger than during the game, or may be displayed in the center of the image display device 5.

31 (D1) and (D2) are examples of error images that can be displayed in the error notification process (S57) as described above. In this embodiment, the error images are (i) variable display results. It is not erased even during the derivation display, and (ii) is displayed with priority over the adjustment result image R.

After executing the effect effect setting process in S163 shown in FIG. 27, for example, the following S170 to S175 are performed according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the predetermined area (effect control flag setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122. Select and execute one of the processes of.

The variable display start waiting process in S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 based on whether or not the first fluctuation start command or the second fluctuation start command from the main board 11 is received. It includes a process to determine whether or not it is. Then, when the first fluctuation start command or the second fluctuation start command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1".

The variable display start setting process of S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 in response to the start of variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform variable display of decorative symbols in, and other various production operations, it includes processing to determine fixed decorative symbols and various production control patterns according to the variation pattern of special symbols and the type of display result. .. When the variable display start setting process is executed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

The variable display effect process in S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122, and various control data from the effect control pattern. Is included, and processing for performing various effect controls during variable display of the decorative pattern is included. In addition, in the variable display effect processing, the final stop symbol as the final stop symbol, which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol, is completely stopped and displayed in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11. (Derived display) processing is included. It should be noted that, in response to the fact that the end code is read from the predetermined effect control pattern, the final decoration symbol may be displayed as a complete stop display (derivative display). In this case, when the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command elapses, the effect control board 12 is autonomous even if the effect control command from the main board 11 is not used. The variable display result can be confirmed by deriving and displaying the fixed decorative symbol. After performing such effect control and the like, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

The special figure hit waiting process in S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when the hit start designation command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the effect process when the attacker is released. On the other hand, when the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the value of the effect process flag is initialized. Update to the value "0".

The effect processing at the time of opening the attacker in S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this effect processing when the attacker is open, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the jackpot game state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the screen of the image display device 5. The game effect lamp 9 is output by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13 to output sound or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, and outputting a command (illuminated signal) to the lamp control board 14. It controls various production operations during a predetermined period in which the big prize opening door as an attacker is opened, such as turning on, turning off, and blinking the decorative LED. In the attacker opening effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, in response to receiving the hit end designation command from the main board 11.

The ending effect processing of S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and displays an effect image based on the set contents on the screen of the image display device 5. , The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by the output of the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and decoration are output by the output of the command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls at the end of the jackpot game state, such as turning on, turning off, and blinking the LED, are executed.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S170 of FIG. 27 as the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command reception flag is on (S651). If the variation pattern specification command reception flag is on (S651; Yes), the variation pattern specification command reception flag is cleared to the off state (S652). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the value "1" corresponding to the variable display start setting process (S171) (S653).

When the variation pattern specification command reception flag is not turned on (that is, the variation pattern specification command is not received) (S651; No), is the effect control CPU 120 displaying the customer waiting demonstration (customer waiting demo)? It is determined whether or not (S654). Whether or not the customer waiting demo is being displayed may be determined based on, for example, the customer waiting demo display flag that is set to the ON state with the execution of S658 described later.

Unless the customer waiting demo is being displayed (S654; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the customer waiting demo designation command reception flag is on (S655). When the customer waiting demo designation command reception flag is on (that is, the customer waiting demo designation command is received) (S655; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 waits after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command. It is determined whether or not the elapsed time has passed 30 seconds (S656). Whether or not 30 seconds have passed since the customer waiting demo designation command was received is determined by turning on the customer waiting demo designation command reception flag in the command analysis process (S54) shown in FIG. 26, for example. When the state is set, a value corresponding to 30 seconds may be set in a predetermined timer, and it may be determined whether or not the timer has timed out.

If 30 seconds have passed since the customer waiting demo designation command was received (S656; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 turns off the customer waiting demo designation command reception flag (S657) and displays the image on the image display device 5. The predetermined customer waiting demonstration display is started (S658). The customer waiting demo display is not limited to the mode of displaying a character string such as "demo display" as shown in FIG. 31 (B), and is arbitrary. For example, a predetermined initial result (for example, "123") A combination of symbols such as "777" or a combination of symbols reminiscent of a big hit such as "777") may be displayed, a predetermined character may be displayed, or a logotype of a gaming machine maker may be displayed.

In this embodiment, the customer waiting demo display is started at a timing 30 seconds after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command (corresponding to when the variable display is interrupted). It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the customer waiting demo display may be started at a timing 20 seconds or 1 minute after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command. Further, for example, the customer waiting demo display may be started as soon as the customer waiting demo designation command is received.

Following the process of S658, or when the customer waiting demo is being displayed (S654; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a menu switching operation (S659). The menu switching operation is, for example, a pressing operation of the push button 31B that can be accepted during the customer waiting demo display, and the effect control CPU 120 performs the menu switching operation when the operation signal from the push button 31B is input. Judge that there was. The operation means capable of accepting the menu switching operation is arbitrary and is not limited to the push button 31B.

When there is a menu switching operation, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the menu mode execution flag is on (S660). If the menu mode execution flag is off (S660; No), the customer waiting demo display is deleted and the menu display is started (the display on the image display device 5 is shown in FIGS. 31 (B) to 31 (C1)). (Switching to such a mode), the menu mode executing flag is set to the on state (S662). On the other hand, if the menu mode execution flag is on (S660; Yes), the menu display is deleted and the customer waiting demo display is restored (the display on the image display device 5 is displayed in FIGS. 31 (C1) to 31 (B). ), Clear the menu mode executing flag to the off state (S661).

Following the process of S662, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a volume adjustment mode selection operation (S663). Whether or not there is a volume adjustment mode selection operation is determined, for example, whether or not an operation signal is input from an operation means that accepts the operation (such as the trigger button of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B as described above). do it. When there is a volume adjustment mode selection operation (S663; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the volume adjustment mode selection flag to the ON state (S664). After the execution of S653, S661, and S664, or when a No determination is made in S655, S656, S659, and S663, the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S171 of FIG. 27 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 34, the effect control CPU 120 first determines the final stop symbol or the like to be the final decorative symbol as the variable display result of the decorative symbol (S321). As the process of S321, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the variable display contents such as the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. , Determine the final stop symbol. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result include "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". be.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not change to the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "loss". ". When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, the final decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "loss". .. When the variable display content is "non-probability change (big hit)", the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the time saving state. When the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the probable change state.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the effect control CPU 120 finally stops the different (mismatched) decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. To decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left confirmed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124, the random counter for effect, or the like, and uses a left confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. By referring to or the like, among the fixed decorative symbols, the left fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right-determined symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect, is extracted, and the right-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. Among the fixed decorative symbols, the right fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right confirmed decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. Among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined.

When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", the effect control CPU 120 finally stops the same (matching) decorative symbol in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. To decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left / right confirmed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124, the random counter for effect, or the like, and uses a left / right confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121. By referring to or the like, among the fixed decorative symbols, the decorative symbols having the same stop-displayed symbol numbers in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 are displayed. decide. Further, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. Therefore, among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol, and the fixed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, an arbitrary value is used. By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to the symbol number of the medium fixed decorative symbol, the fixed decorative symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-fixed decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. ..

When the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", the effect control CPU 120 has "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The same (matching) decorative symbol is determined as the final stop symbol. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot confirmed symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot confirmation symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 Determines decorative symbols with the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed along with 5C and 5R. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", and whether or not the promotion effect during big hit is executed, a normal symbol (for example, an even number) is displayed. It suffices to determine which of the indicated decorative symbol) and the probabilistic pattern (for example, the decorative symbol indicating an odd number) is used as the final decorative symbol. In the big hit middle promotion effect, the combination of decorative symbols (non-probable change big hit combination) that reminds the big hit but does not remind the probability change state is temporarily stopped and displayed in the image display device 5, and then the big hit game state or the big hit game state. It is a production that notifies whether or not a probable change state is reached at the end of.

As a specific example, when the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)", a fixed decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. In addition, when it is determined that the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)" and the promotion effect during the big hit is not executed, the definite decoration symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of probabilistic symbols. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the promotion effect during the big hit even if the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the fixed decorative symbol is decided from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. As a result, even though the probabilistic symbols are aligned and displayed as the final decorative symbols, it is possible to prevent the promotion effect during the jackpot from being executed so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

In this way, by determining the final stop symbol according to the variable display content by the processing of S321, whether or not to control the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state based on the determination result of the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game. It is possible to determine the variable display result of the decorative pattern related to the determination result. Further, in the process of S321, the small symbol corresponding to the fixed decorative symbol may be determined as the display result in the variable display of the small symbol.

In the process of S321, when the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", it is determined whether or not to execute the probabilistic promotion effect such as the re-lottery effect or the big hit medium promotion effect. May be done. In the re-lottery effect, once the decorative symbol of the non-probable variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, it is once difficult or unrecognizable to be controlled to the probabilistic state. It is possible to notify that the decorative symbol is controlled to the probabilistic state by displaying (re-variating) the decorative symbol again and stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of the probabilistic jackpot combination consisting of the same probabilistic symbol. In some cases, the decorative symbol of the non-probable change jackpot combination is stopped and displayed after the decorative symbol is re-variated by the re-lottery effect, so that it is not notified that the decorative symbol is controlled to the probabilistic state. When it is determined in the process of S321 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed, a combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the re-lottery effect is executed.

Following the determination of the final stop symbol and the like in the process of S321, the change effect setting process for setting the execution of the hold display change effect is executed (S322). In the change effect setting process, when the execution condition of the hold display change effect is satisfied based on the stored contents of the hold display data storage unit, the execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed. In the change effect setting process, the execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed when the execution condition of the hold display change effect is satisfied based on whether or not the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" is executed. You may do so.

Following the process of S322, the effect control CPU 120 executes the full screen advance notice effect setting process (S322A) for setting the full screen advance notice effect as a predetermined advance notice effect. In the full-screen notice effect setting process, for example, as shown in FIG. 41 (B2), it is difficult to visually recognize the display mode of the decorative pattern by displaying a covered image such as a darkened image DG on the entire display screen of the image display device 5 at the start of fluctuation. Execution settings for a notice effect (full screen notice effect) that covers the entire screen, such as a blackout effect, are performed. The covered image is not limited to the darkened image DG or the black image, but may be an image having a predetermined color or pattern such as an image of a light emitting mode or an image of a freeze mode, and a display form of a decorative pattern (particularly). Any image may be used as long as the display content of the decorative pattern) is difficult to see or cannot be seen. In addition, the predetermined notice effect may be a panel type (panel display format) step-up notice, cut-in notice, story notice, mini-game notice, development notice, etc., and the entire display screen or a part (at least a decorative pattern). It is a notice effect displayed on the part where the decoration pattern can be hidden), and at least the decorative pattern (for example, the display form or display content of the decorative pattern) cannot be seen at all (transparency is zero). It may be a notice effect to be performed, or a notice effect that makes it difficult to see, such as the display screen or the decorative pattern being seen through (low transparency). In addition, the processing of S322A is set as "notice effect setting process", and other advance notice effects other than the above-mentioned full-screen advance notice effect, that is, other advance notice effects during variable display (step-up notice, dialogue notice, etc.) are also determined at the same time. You may try to do it.

Following the process of S322A, the symbol advance notice effect setting process (S322B) is executed. In the symbol advance notice effect setting process, for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 (B1) and (D2), an image G of an aura (halo) of a predetermined color (for example, blue, green, red, etc.) is displayed around the decorative symbol. The execution setting of the advance notice effect (design advance notice effect) is performed. The design notice effect is not limited to the aura display, but may be a notice related to or incidental to the decorative design (for example, a character notice in which a character appears, a background notice in which the background display mode changes, etc.). It may be a notice of changing the display mode (for example, color, shape, etc.) of itself to a display mode different from the usual decorative pattern. For example, in the case of a character notice, a plurality of character notices having different costumes, sizes, poses, types, etc. of the characters may be provided, or a plurality of background notices having different background display modes may be provided.

Following the process of S322B, the symbol reverse direction start display setting process (S322C) is executed. In the symbol reverse direction start display setting process, for example, as shown in FIG. 41 (B1), a specific direction (for example, forward direction (downward direction)) different from a predetermined direction (for example, forward direction (downward direction)) of the display screen of the image display device 5 at the start of fluctuation is used. , The execution setting of the symbol reverse direction start display such that the decorative symbol starts (starts fluctuation or displacement) in the opposite direction (upward direction) opposite to the forward direction is performed. In this embodiment, the predetermined direction in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed is downward, but it may be upward, left, right, diagonal, forward, backward, or the like. .. The predetermined directions include, for example, a basic fluctuation direction, a direction in which the identification information is mainly displaced in the variable display, a fluctuation direction when there is no advance notice effect, and a fluctuation direction that the player sees most (exclusively). The normal direction such as the fluctuation direction at the time of derivation display is included. The specific direction is the reverse direction (upward direction), but may be a direction different from the forward direction (for example, left direction, right direction, diagonal direction, front direction, rear direction, etc.) other than the upward direction. In FIG. 34, the full screen advance notice effect setting process (S322A), the symbol advance notice effect setting process (S322B), and the symbol reverse direction start display setting process (S322C) are executed in this order, but in an order other than this order. There may be.

Following the process of S322C, the symbol advance notice effect timing adjustment process (S322D) is executed. In the symbol advance notice effect timing adjustment process, when there is no full screen advance notice effect, the symbol advance notice effect timing is set at the start of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 40 (A), but when there is a full screen advance notice effect, , As shown in FIG. 40 (B), adjustments are made such that the symbol advance notice effect timing is changed after the full screen notice execution period.

Following the processing of S322D, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (S323). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (special figure variation effect control pattern) in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and uses it as a usage pattern. set. Further, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (display change effect control patterns) in response to the execution setting of the hold display change effect by the change effect setting process of S322, and uses the pattern. Set as.

Following the processing of S323, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 is set corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command ( S324). Then, a setting is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to start the fluctuation of the decorative pattern or the like (S325). At this time, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in the process of S323 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123. As a result, the variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5.

Further, in the process of S325, the variation of the decorative symbol is started, and the setting for starting the variation of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 5V is performed. As a result, in the small symbol display area 5V, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in synchronization with each of the special figure game using the first special figure and the special figure game using the second special figure, the small symbol is displayed. Variable display of symbols can also be started. In the small symbol display area 5V, the small symbol (first small symbol) whose variable display is started in synchronization with the special symbol game using the first special symbol and the special symbol game using the second special symbol can be used. The small symbol (second small symbol) whose variable display is started in synchronization may be arranged separately. As an example, the first small symbol that is variably displayed corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is arranged on the right side in the small symbol display area 5V, and corresponds to the special figure game using the second special figure. The second small symbol that is variably displayed may be arranged on the left side in the small symbol display area 5V. In this way, by confirming which of the first small symbol and the second small symbol is variably displayed, either the special figure game using the first special figure or the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. It suffices if the player or the like can identify whether or not the game has been played. When the first small symbol and the second small symbol are arranged separately, for example, a special figure game using the first special figure and a second special figure based on a fluctuation start command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like. Of the special figure games using the above, it is sufficient to determine which special figure game the variable display is started. Then, when the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the variable display of the first small symbol is started, while when the special figure game using the second special figure is started, the second small symbol is started. The variable display of small symbols may be started. In this way, in the small symbol display area 5V, the display result is derived by variably displaying the effect image showing the first small symbol which is the first notification information image in synchronization with the special symbol game using the first special symbol. , The display result may be derived by variably displaying the effect image showing the second small symbol which is the second broadcast information image in synchronization with the special figure game using the second special figure.

After the processing of S325 is executed, the first hold display of the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display of the second hold display unit 5HL are updated in response to the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. (S326). For example, when a special figure game using the first special figure is executed (started), the display part (the display part at the left end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is deleted in the first hold display unit 5HR (the display part at the left end) is deleted (the display part at the left end). At the same time, the first hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4" is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. On the other hand, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed (started), the display part (the display part at the right end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is deleted in the second hold display unit 5HL. At the same time (digestion), the second hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4" is moved (shifted) one by one to the right. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S327), and then the variable display start setting process ends.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S322A of FIG. 34 as the full-screen notice effect setting process. In the full-screen notice effect setting process shown in FIG. 35, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether it is a super reach variation pattern or a non-reach variation pattern based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command from the main board 11. Judgment (S501). When it is determined that the pattern is a super reach variation pattern or a non-reach variation pattern (S501; Yes), the presence or absence of the full-screen notice effect is determined (S502).

Specifically, in the process of S502, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the full-screen notice, and also extracts the extracted numerical data and the table for determining the full-screen notice shown in FIG. 35 (B). It is used to determine whether or not to execute the full-screen notice effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 35 (B), in the case of the non-reach fluctuation pattern, "without execution" is determined with a probability of 90% and "with execution" is determined with a probability of 10%, and in the case of the super reach (loss) fluctuation pattern. Is determined with a probability of 60% for "without execution" and 40% for "with execution", and in the case of a super reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern, "without execution" is 30% and "with execution" is 70%. Determined by probability. In the case of a big hit, the full-screen notice effect is easier to be executed than in the case of a loss, and the expectation of a big hit can be obtained for the full-screen notice effect, and the interest of the game is improved. The super reach variation pattern may include a variation pattern having a pseudo-continuous variation as shown in FIG. 24. For example, the determination ratio may be set so that the degree of expectation increases as the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations increases. The determination ratio may be set differently depending on whether or not it is a big hit and the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations.

After executing the process of S502, it is determined whether or not the full-screen notice effect is determined to be present (S503). When it is determined that the full-screen notice effect is present (S503; Yes), the full-screen notice flag is set to the on state (S504). After executing the process of S504, the forward (downward) fluctuation start timing of the decorative symbol is changed to the second timing (timing T03) after the end of the full-screen notice effect (S505). For example, as shown in FIGS. 40 (B) and 30 (B), when there is a symbol reverse start display (reverse fluctuation) at the start of fluctuation, the start timing of forward fluctuation is timing T01 (first timing). Instead, it is changed to the timing T03 (second timing) after the end of the full-screen notice effect. Further, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), even when there is no symbol reverse direction start display (reverse change) at the start of the change, the start timing of the forward change is the timing T03 (second timing) after the end of the full-screen notice effect. ) Is changed.

When it is determined in S501 that it is neither a super reach fluctuation pattern nor a non-reach fluctuation pattern (S501; No), when there is no full-screen notice effect in S503, or after the processing of S505 is executed, all The screen notice effect setting process ends.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S322B of FIG. 34 as the symbol advance notice effect setting process. In the symbol advance notice effect setting process shown in FIG. 36, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether it is a super reach variation pattern or a non-reach variation pattern based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command from the main board 11. (S511). When it is determined that the pattern is a super reach variation pattern or a non-reach variation pattern (S511; Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a symbol advance notice effect (S512).

Specifically, in the process of S512, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the symbol advance notice, and uses the extracted numerical data and the symbol advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 36 (B). , Decide whether or not to execute the design notice effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 36 (B), in the case of the non-reach fluctuation pattern, "without execution" is determined with a probability of 90% and "with execution" is determined with a probability of 10%, and in the case of the super reach (loss) fluctuation pattern. Is determined with a probability of 60% for "without execution" and 40% for "with execution", and in the case of a super reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern, "without execution" is 30% and "with execution" is 70%. Determined by probability. In the case of a big hit, it is easier to execute the symbol advance notice effect than in the case of a loss, and it is possible to have a feeling of expectation of the big hit about the symbol advance notice effect, and the interest of the game is improved. The super reach variation pattern may include a variation pattern having a pseudo-continuous variation as shown in FIG. 24. For example, the determination ratio may be set so that the degree of expectation increases as the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations increases. The determination ratio may be set differently depending on whether or not it is a big hit and the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations.

After executing the process of S512, it is determined whether or not the symbol advance notice effect is determined to be present (S513). When it is determined that there is a symbol notice effect (S513; Yes), the symbol notice flag is set to the on state (S514). After executing the process of S514, the type of the symbol notice is determined (S515).

Specifically, in the process of S515, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the symbol advance notice effect type, and also extracts the extracted numerical data and the symbol advance notice effect type determination table shown in FIG. 36 (C). And, the type of the symbol advance notice effect, that is, the color of the aura of the decorative symbol (the color of the image G of the aura) is determined. For example, as shown in FIG. 36 (C), in the case of the non-reach fluctuation pattern, it is determined to be "blue", and in the case of the super reach (loss) fluctuation pattern, "blue" is 50% and "green" is 40. %, "Red" is determined with a probability of 10%, and in the case of a super reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern, "blue" is determined with a probability of 10%, "green" is determined with a probability of 30%, and "red" is determined with a probability of 60%. NS. As for the jackpot expectation, the aura increases in the order of blue <green <red, and it is possible to have a sense of jackpot expectation regarding the type of symbol notice production (difference in aura color), and it is interesting for the design notice production. It can be done and the fun of the game is improved. In the case of the super reach (loss) fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 36 (C), “red” may be set to 0%. In this case, the "red" color of the aura can be used as a premium symbol notice that confirms the big hit.

When it is determined in S511 that it is neither a super reach fluctuation pattern nor a non-reach fluctuation pattern (S511; No), when there is no symbol notice effect in S513, or after the processing of S515 is executed, the symbol notice is given. End the effect setting process.

FIG. 37 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S322C of FIG. 20 as the symbol reverse direction start display setting process. In the symbol reverse start display setting process shown in FIG. 37 (A), the effect control CPU 120 has a super reach variation pattern or a non-reach variation pattern based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command from the main board 11. (S521). When it is determined that the pattern is a super reach variation pattern or a non-reach variation pattern (S521; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol reverse start display is present (S522).

Specifically, in the process of S522, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the symbol reverse start display, and also determines the extracted numerical data and the symbol reverse start display determination shown in FIG. 37 (B). It is determined whether or not to execute the symbol reverse start display by using the table. For example, as shown in FIG. 37 (B), in the case of the non-reach fluctuation pattern, "without execution" is determined with a probability of 90% and "with execution" is determined with a probability of 10%, and in the case of the super reach (loss) fluctuation pattern. Is determined with a probability of 60% for "without execution" and 40% for "with execution", and in the case of a super reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern, "without execution" is 30% and "with execution" is 70%. Determined by probability. In the case of a big hit, the symbol reverse direction start display is easier to be executed than in the case of a loss, and it is possible to have a feeling of expectation of a big hit about the symbol reverse start display, and the interest of the game is improved.

After executing the process of S522, it is determined whether or not the symbol reverse direction start display is determined to be present (S523). When it is determined that the symbol reverse start display is present (S523; Yes), the symbol reverse start display control setting is performed (S524). For example, as shown in FIGS. 40A and 40B, a display for executing reverse movement of the decorative symbol during the reverse fluctuation period (that is, the period from the timing T01 at the start of fluctuation to the timing T03 at the end of reverse fluctuation). Make control settings. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no symbol reverse start display (S523; No), it is determined whether or not the full screen notice flag is on (S525).

If the full-screen notice flag is on (S525; Yes), the symbol is set to swing during the full-screen notice effect period (S526). As shown in FIG. 44 (B), during the full-screen notice production period (the period from the fluctuation start timing T01 to the full-screen notice pay timing T03), the decorative symbol is set to swing laterally with the reference position Ref. Is done. Since the swing of the decorative pattern is hidden by the blackout effect (full screen notice) shown in FIGS. 45 (B2) and (C2), it cannot be seen by the player, but it is decorated as in the modified example 1 described later. If the period of the full-screen notice effect is shorter than the period from the start of the symbol fluctuation to the start of the forward fluctuation, the swing of the decorative symbol can be visually recognized during the period of timings T11 to T12 and the period of timings T13 to T14. It becomes. On the other hand, if the full-screen notice flag is not on (S525; No), as shown in FIG. 44 (A), the forward fluctuation start timing of the decorative symbol is set to the timing T01 (first timing) at the start of fluctuation. (S527).

When it is determined in S521 that it is neither a super reach fluctuation pattern nor a non-reach fluctuation pattern (S521; No), or after the processes of S524, S526, and S527 are executed, the symbol reverse direction start display setting process is terminated. ..

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S322D of FIG. 34 as the symbol advance notice effect timing adjustment process. In the symbol advance notice effect timing adjustment process shown in FIG. 38, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the symbol advance notice flag is on (S531). If the symbol notice flag is on (S531; Yes), it is determined whether or not the full screen notice flag is on (S532). If the full-screen notice flag is on (S532; Yes), the symbol notice effect is set after the end of the full-screen notice effect period (S533). On the other hand, if the full-screen notice flag is off (S532; No), the symbol notice effect is set at the start of fluctuation (S534). When the symbol advance notice flag is off in S531 (S531; No), or after the processes of S533 and S534 are executed, the symbol advance notice effect timing adjustment process is terminated.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S172 of FIG. 27 as the effect process during variable display. In the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 39, first, it is determined whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (S341). As an example, in the process of S341, when the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted) and the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value. , It may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

If the variable display time has not elapsed in S341 (S341; No), it is determined whether or not it is the hold display change effect period for executing the hold display change effect (S342). The hold display change effect period may be predetermined in, for example, an effect control pattern (display change effect control pattern) determined by the process of S323 shown in FIG. 34. In the case of the hold display change effect period (S342; Yes), control for executing the hold display change effect is performed (S343). In the process of S343, various commands created based on the setting of the display change effect control pattern are transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, blinking or extinguished. Or, by combining a part or all of these, it is sufficient that the hold display change effect can be executed by a predetermined effect device.

The effect image showing the character (character for change effect) in the hold display change common effect among the hold display change effects is started to be displayed by executing the process of S603 shown in FIG. 28, and the display is started in S607, When the process of S609 is executed, display control is performed during variable display or when the symbol is confirmed, and when the process of S605 is executed, the display ends. Therefore, in the process of S343, it is not necessary to perform display control regarding the change effect character. Alternatively, in the variable display in which the action effect in the hold display change effect is executed, the display control of the change effect character is performed by the processing of S343, and in the variable display in which the action effect is not executed, the change effect character is executed by the process of S343. Display control may not be performed.

Whether or not it is the full-screen notice effect period for executing the full-screen notice effect when it is determined in S342 that it is not the hold display change effect period (S342; No) or after the processing of S343 is executed. Is determined (S344). In the case of the full-screen notice effect period (S344; Yes), control for executing the full-screen notice effect is performed (S344A).

When it is determined in S344 that it is not the full screen advance notice effect period (S344; No), or after the processing of S344A is executed, it is determined whether or not it is the symbol advance notice effect period for executing the symbol advance notice effect. (S344B). In the case of the symbol advance notice effect period (S344B; Yes), control for executing the symbol advance notice effect is performed (S345).

Whether or not it is the symbol reverse start display period for executing the symbol reverse start display when it is determined in S344B that it is not the symbol notice effect period (S344B; No), or after the processing of S345 is executed. (S345A). In the case of the symbol reverse start display period (S345A; Yes), control for executing the symbol reverse start display is performed (S345B). Further, immediately after S345, immediately after S345B, or the like, other notice effects (step-up notice, dialogue notice, etc.) during variable display may be executed.

When it is determined in S345A that it is not the symbol reverse start period (S345A; No), or after the processing of S345B is executed, it is determined whether or not it is the reach effect period for executing the reach effect (S345A; No). S346). The reach effect period may be predetermined in, for example, an effect control pattern determined according to the fluctuation pattern. When it is determined in S346 that the reach effect period is in effect (S346; Yes), control for executing the reach effect is performed (S347).

When it is determined in S346 that it is not the reach effect period (S346; No), or after the processing of S347 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the effect control pattern determined in response to the fluctuation pattern, for example. Based on the above, other controls for executing the effect during the variable display including the variable display operation of the decorative symbol are performed (S348).

When the variable display time has elapsed in S341 (S341; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (S349). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (S349; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the process waits. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so.

When a symbol confirmation command is received in S349 (S349; Yes), for example, a predetermined display control command is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, and the display result is displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) to be displayed (S350). Further, in the process of S350, the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed, and the small symbol variation end control for ending the variation of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 5V is performed. In this small symbol variation end control, as a display result in the variable display of the small symbol, the small symbol corresponding to the fixed decorative symbol determined by the process of S321 shown in FIG. 20 is stopped and displayed in the small symbol display area 5V. Just do it. As a result, in the small symbol display area 5V, the final decorative symbol that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol is synchronized with each of the special symbol game using the first special symbol and the special symbol game using the second symbol. When it is derived and the variable display ends, the variable display of the small symbol can also end. At this time, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command (S351). Further, in the process of S351A, the full screen notice flag and the symbol notice flag are reset to the off state (S351A). Further, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the waiting process for hitting the special figure (S352), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

For example, in the process of S348 shown in FIG. 39, the display control in the small symbol display area 5V is performed so that the small symbol is always variably displayed in a constant variable mode regardless of the variable display state of the decorative symbol. It should be. For example, when the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, or when a variable display effect such as "pseudo-ream" is executed, the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C of "left", "middle", and "right" are executed. Even when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in part or all of the 5R, in the small symbol display area 5V, the small symbol is not temporarily stopped and is continuously variable at a constant speed. Should be done.

Hereinafter, an example of specific control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

In the pachinko game machine 1, for example, after a game ball driven into the game area passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening and a starting winning such as a first starting winning or a second starting winning is generated. , The variable display of the special symbol is started in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B based on the establishment of the start condition that allows the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. NS. On the screen of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol and the small symbol are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol.

When the first start condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of the first start prize due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start prize opening, the processes S203 and S207 shown in FIG. 18 are executed. The number of 1st special figure reserved storage is added by 1. When the second start condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of the second start prize due to the game ball passing (entering) the second start prize opening, the processes of S206 and S207 shown in FIG. 18 are executed. The number of second special figure reserved storage is added by 1. At this time, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted by the processing of S209. Then, by executing the winning random number value determination processing as shown in FIG. 19 in S212, the variable display content such as whether or not the variable display result becomes a "big hit" is determined, and the winning determination result is determined. The winning determination result command shown is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

Then, it is determined whether or not the effect control command transmitted at the time of starting winning, including the winning determination result command, has been received. Then, when it is determined that the command is received, the presence / absence and type of the hold display change effect are determined based on the specified winning determination result. When it is decided to execute the hold display change effect, the presence or absence of the display change is determined. If it is determined that there is a display change, the hold display change pattern is determined, and if it is determined that there is no display change, the change effect timing pattern is determined. The determination result of the hold display change pattern and the change effect timing pattern is stored in the hold display data storage unit in association with the hold number.

In S602 shown in FIG. 28, it is determined whether or not there is a setting for executing a change effect such as a hold display change effect based on the stored contents in the hold display data storage unit. Then, when it is determined that there is a setting, the display start control of S603 starts the display of the effect image showing the character (character for change effect). The effect image showing the change effect character can be continuously displayed over a plurality of variable displays until it is determined in S604 that the display end timing is reached. When each variable display is started, it is determined in S606 that the variable start command has been received, so that the control start setting of S607 is performed, and the display mode of the effect image showing the change effect character is a decorative pattern. The action mode corresponds to the variable display (during fluctuation). On the other hand, when the display result in each variable display is derived, it is determined in S608 that the symbol confirmation command has been received, so that the control start setting of S609 is performed, and the effect image showing the change effect character is performed. The display mode of is a stationary mode corresponding to the final display of the decorative pattern. In this way, during the period in which the display result of the effect image showing the decorative pattern to be the identification information image is derived, the display mode of the effect image showing the character can be set to the stationary mode.

When the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the establishment of the start condition, the variation pattern setting process as shown in FIG. 23 is executed in S111 shown in FIG. A fluctuation pattern designation command that determines one of them and indicates that the determined fluctuation pattern can be specified is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

In S321 shown in FIG. 34, when the final stop symbol or the like is determined based on the fluctuation pattern or the like indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, and subsequently, in the change effect setting process of S322, when it is determined that the hold display change timing is reached. The execution setting of the hold display change effect is set to. Subsequently, in the full-screen notice effect setting process of S322A, the presence / absence of the full-screen notice effect is determined, and when it is determined that the full-screen notice effect is present, the execution setting of the full-screen notice effect is performed. Subsequently, in the symbol notification effect setting process of S322B, the presence / absence of the symbol advance notice effect is determined, and when it is determined that the symbol advance notice effect is present, the execution setting of the symbol advance notice effect is performed. Subsequently, in the symbol reverse start display setting process of S322C, the presence / absence of the symbol reverse start display is determined, and when it is determined that the symbol reverse start display is present, the execution setting of the symbol reverse start display is performed. Subsequently, in the symbol advance notice effect timing adjustment process of S322D, the adjustment setting of the symbol advance notice effect timing is performed. Then, in S172 shown in FIG. 27, the decorative symbol is variably displayed (variable display) based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and the decorative symbol is confirmed as the final stop symbol which is the variable display result. A complete stop display (derivative display) is performed on the decorative pattern. During each effect period during this variable display, full-screen advance notice effect, symbol advance notice effect, symbol reverse direction start display, reach effect, and the like can be executed.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41, an example will be described in which the symbol advance notice effect and the reverse fluctuation are displayed in the case of the presence / absence of the full screen advance notice effect. FIG. 40 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative symbol and each advance notice effect, and FIG. 40 shows the case where the full screen advance notice effect is not executed in (A) and the full screen advance notice effect is executed in (B). .. FIG. 41 shows an example of effect execution in the case shown in FIG. 40 during the start period of the super reach variation display. Specifically, FIGS. 41 (A) and (B1) to (E1) are production execution examples in the case of FIG. 40 (A), and FIGS. 41 (A) and (B2) to (E2) are shown in FIG. 40 (E2). This is an example of executing the effect in the case of B).

As shown in FIG. 40 (A), regarding the variation display of the decorative symbol, the reverse variation of all the decorative symbols is started at the start of the variation (timing T01), and the reverse variation is completed (timing T03). After the forward fluctuation of the decorative symbol is started, the fluctuation becomes high speed, and then the fluctuation of the left and right decorative symbols is decelerated, the reach is displayed (reach is established), and the reach effect is executed. Further, regarding each advance notice effect, in FIG. 40 (A), it is determined that the full-screen advance notice effect is not executed, and the reverse start display of the decorative symbol and the symbol advance notice effect are started at the timing T01. .. The symbol advance notice production ends at timing T02, and the reverse direction fluctuation ends at timing T03. At the end of this reverse movement (timing T03), the decoration design starts to move in the forward direction. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, as shown in FIG. 41 (A), the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed at the reference position Ref in the previous variation display, and then in order as shown in FIG. 41 (B1). The variation in the opposite direction (upward direction) opposite to the direction (downward direction) is started, and the symbol advance notice effect as shown in FIG. 41 (B1), that is, a predetermined color (for example, blue, green) around the decorative symbol. , Red color, etc.) Aura (halo) image G is displayed. Then, at the end of the reverse fluctuation shown in FIG. 40 (A) (timing T03), the reverse fluctuation of the decorative symbol is stopped as shown in FIG. 41 (C1), and the decorative symbol is decorated as shown in FIG. 41 (D1). The forward variation of the symbol is started, and the decorative symbol is displayed as the forward variation beyond the reference position Ref shown in FIG. 41 (E1).

On the other hand, in FIG. 40B, since it is determined that the full-screen notice effect is executed, the symbol advance notice effect is changed from the initial value of the timing T01 to the timing T03. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) is started as shown in FIG. 41 (B2), and is included in the full-screen notice effect as shown in FIG. 41 (C2). A notification image such as "chance!" Is displayed, and the symbol is displayed after the full-screen notice effect of FIG. 41 (C2) is completed, that is, when the forward variation of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. 41 (D2). It has been changed so that the notice production will start. That is, the start of the symbol advance notice effect is changed not at the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 41 (B1) but after the end of the full-screen advance notice effect (blackout effect) shown in FIG. 41 (D2). As a result, it is possible to prevent the symbol advance notice effect from being hidden behind the full-screen advance notice effect and being hidden. Although the reverse start display of the decorative pattern is executed without change, it is hidden behind the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in FIGS. 41 (B2) and (C2), so that the player can see it. can not see. Further, although the notification image shown in FIG. 41 (C2) is included in the full-screen notice effect, it may be a notice executed separately from the full-screen notice effect, or the notification image may not be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 41 (D2), the symbol advance notice effect is started before the decorative symbol reaches the reference position Ref, but as shown by the alternate long and short dash arrow, the decorative symbol has returned to the reference position Ref. It is also possible to execute the design notice effect from. Further, the execution period of the symbol advance notice effect is shorter than the execution period of the reverse direction variation as shown in FIG. 40 (A), but may be the same as or longer than the execution period of the reverse direction variation. The same applies when the start is changed to the timing T03 as shown in FIG. 40 (B).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43, an example will be described in which the reverse fluctuation is displayed in the case where the symbol advance notice effect is not executed and the full screen advance notice effect is present or absent. FIG. 42 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative symbol and each advance notice effect, and in (A), when the symbol advance notice effect and the full screen advance notice effect are not executed and the reverse variation is executed, (B). Will show the case where the symbol advance notice effect is not executed and the full-screen advance notice effect and the reverse fluctuation are executed. FIG. 43 shows an example of effect execution in the case shown in FIG. 28 during the start period of the super reach variation display. Specifically, FIGS. 43 (A), (B1), (C1), (D), and (E) are production execution examples in the case of FIG. 42 (A), and FIGS. 43 (A), (B2), and (E). C2), (D), and (E) are production execution examples in the case of FIG. 42 (B).

Since the variable display of the decorative design shown in FIG. 42 (A) is the same as that in FIG. 40 (A) described above, the description thereof will be omitted here. Further, regarding each notice effect, in FIG. 40 (A), it is determined that the full screen notice effect and the symbol advance notice effect are not executed, and the reverse start display of the decorative symbol is started at the timing T01, and the reverse direction is started. The directional change ends at timing T03. At the end of this reverse movement (timing T03), the decoration design starts to move in the forward direction. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, as shown in FIG. 43 (A), the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed at the reference position Ref in the previous variation display, and is shown in FIGS. 43 (B1) and 43 (B1). As shown in FIG. 43 (C1), the reverse (upward) fluctuation opposite to the forward (downward) movement is started, and at the end of the reverse movement (timing T03) shown in FIG. 28 (A). As shown in FIG. 43 (D), the reverse fluctuation of the decorative symbol is stopped, the forward fluctuation of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. 43 (D), and the decorative symbol is forwardly moved beyond the reference position Ref shown in FIG. 43 (E1). It will be displayed in a variable manner.

On the other hand, in FIG. 42 (B), it is determined that the symbol advance notice effect is not executed, and that the full screen advance notice effect and the reverse direction change are executed. Is started at the start of fluctuation (timing T01) and ends together at timing T03. At the end of this reverse movement (timing T03), the decoration design starts to move in the forward direction. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) is started as shown in FIG. 43 (B2), and is included in the full-screen notice effect as shown in FIG. 43 (C2). A notification image such as "chance!" Is displayed, and after the full-screen notice effect of FIG. 43 (C2) is completed, that is, the forward variation of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. 43 (D). Although the reverse start display of the decorative symbol is executed, it is hidden behind the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in FIGS. 43 (B2) and (C2), so that the player sees the reverse direction. I can't see the fluctuation. Further, although the notification image shown in FIG. 43 (C2) is included in the full-screen notice effect, it may be a notice executed separately from the full-screen notice effect, or the notification image may not be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 43 (D), the variation display in the forward direction is visible from before the decorative symbol reaches the reference position Ref, but as shown by the alternate long and short dash arrow, the decorative symbol is at the reference position Ref. The fluctuation display in the forward direction from the returned state may be visible.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45, an example will be described in which the symbol advance notice effect is executed in the case where the reverse direction variation is not executed and the full screen advance notice effect is present or absent. FIG. 44 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative pattern and each advance notice effect, etc. In (A), there is no execution of the full-screen advance notice effect and the reverse direction change, and in (B), there is no execution of the reverse direction change. , Indicates a case where the full-screen notice effect and the design notice effect are executed. FIG. 45 shows an example of effect execution in the case shown in FIG. 30 during the start period of the super reach variation display. Specifically, FIGS. 45 (A) and 45 (B1) are production execution examples in the case of FIG. 44 (A), and FIGS. 45 (A), (B2), (C2) and (D2) are FIGS. 44. It is an production execution example in the case of (B).

Since the variable display of the decorative design shown in FIG. 44 (A) is the same as that in FIG. 40 (A) described above, the description thereof will be omitted here. Further, regarding each advance notice effect, in FIG. 44 (A), it is determined that the full-screen advance notice effect and the reverse direction change of the decorative symbol are not executed, and the symbol advance notice effect is performed at the start of the change (timing T01). Is started. The design notice production will end at the subsequent timing T02. The forward variation of the decorative symbol is also started at the start of the variation (timing T01). Looking at the production execution example at this time, as shown in FIG. 45 (A), the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed at the reference position Ref in the previous variation display, and then in order as shown in FIG. 45 (B1). As the change in the direction (downward direction) is started, the symbol advance notice effect as shown in FIG. 45 (B1), that is, the aura (after) of a predetermined color (for example, blue, green, red, etc.) around the decorative symbol. The notice effect that the image G of the light) is displayed is also started.

On the other hand, in FIG. 44 (B), since it is determined that the symbol advance notice effect and the full-screen advance notice effect are executed, the symbol advance notice effect is changed from the timing T01 as the initial value to the timing T03. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) is started as shown in FIG. 45 (B2), and is included in the full-screen notice effect as shown in FIG. 45 (C2). A notification image such as "chance!" Is displayed, and the symbol is displayed after the full-screen notice effect of FIG. 45 (C2) is completed, that is, when the forward variation of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. 45 (D2). It has been changed so that the notice production will start. That is, the start of the symbol advance notice effect is changed not at the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 45 (B1) but after the end of the full screen advance notice effect (blackout effect) shown in FIG. 45 (D2). As a result, it is possible to prevent the symbol advance notice effect from being hidden behind the full-screen advance notice effect and being hidden. As shown in FIG. 44 (B), it is determined that the symbol advance notice effect and the full-screen advance notice effect are executed, and the decorative symbol is determined not to be executed in the reverse direction. During the execution period of the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in C2), the decorative pattern is swung as shown in FIG. 44 (B), but it is hidden behind the full-screen notice effect. Therefore, the player cannot see the swing of the decorative pattern. The start of the forward variation of the decorative pattern is changed after the execution period of the full-screen notice effect ends. Further, although the notification image shown in FIG. 45 (C2) is included in the full-screen notice effect, it may be a notice executed separately from the full-screen notice effect, or the notification image may not be displayed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 46, an example of the case where the adjustment result image R is displayed during a predetermined effect will be described. FIG. 46 shows an effect execution example when the operation promotion image P is displayed and a predetermined cut-in effect is included in the super reach variation pattern.

When the variable display (variation) of the decorative symbol is executed and the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state as shown in FIG. 46 (A), a predetermined reach effect in the normal reach is executed, and then FIG. 46 (B) By displaying the development notification image (“Super Reach!” In the illustrated example) as shown in (1) on the image display device 5, the development notification to Super Reach is performed. When the adjustment operation is performed by the player during the fluctuation, the adjustment result image R is displayed at the lower right end of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 46 (B) (corresponding to S710 in FIG. 30).

Following such development notification, the operation promotion image P is displayed during the execution of the reach effect in the super reach as shown in FIG. 46 (C) (start of the operation promotion display). Then, when the push button 31B is operated, a predetermined cut-in effect is executed as shown in FIG. 46 (D). If the push button 31B is not operated during the display period of the operation promotion image P, the cut-in effect is not executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 46 (E), for example, the final stop symbol of the jackpot combination is derived and displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 46 (B) to 46 (D), the adjustment result image R remains displayed on the image display device 5 until the predetermined period T1 elapses after the adjustment operation is performed. In this case, the adjustment result image R is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the development notification image or the operation promotion image P (an example of the specific effect image). However, in the variable display result derivation period T2, the adjustment result image R is erased (corresponding to S712) as shown in FIG. 46 (E) even if the predetermined period T1 has not elapsed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result that is derived and displayed.

In the change effect character display process shown in FIG. 28, when it is determined in S601 that the character is not being displayed, it is determined in S602 whether or not there is a setting for executing the change effect. At this time, the process of S603 is executed by determining that there is a setting for executing the change effect based on the stored contents of the hold display data storage unit. As a result, for example, the effect image of the character CH1 shown in FIG. 29B is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

After that, for example, a hold display change common effect including an action effect such that the effect image of the character CH1 shown in FIG. 29B acts on a predetermined hold display (for example, the hold display of the hold number “3”) is executed. .. Subsequently, the hold display change effect is executed according to the presence / absence of the display change and the determination result of the hold display change pattern. For example, when it is determined that "there is a display change" in the process of determining the presence or absence of a display change (not shown) and the first pending display change pattern is determined in the process of determining the pending display change pattern (not shown). As the display mode of the hold display, the hold display change success effect in which the display color changes to blue among the specific colors is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined as "no display change" in the process of determining whether or not there is a display change (not shown), a hold display change failure effect (hold change effect) is executed in which the display mode of the hold display does not change. NS.

Even when the final decorative symbol, which is the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol, is derived, the effect image showing the character CH1 continues until the display end timing is determined by the process of S604 shown in FIG. 28. Is displayed. At this time, the process of S609 is executed by determining that the symbol confirmation command has been received in the process of S608. As a result, during the period in which the definite decorative symbol is derived, the display mode of the effect image showing the character CH1 becomes the stationary mode. Subsequently, when variable display of a special symbol, decorative symbol, or the like is started based on the number of reserved memories being other than "0", it is determined that the variable start command has been received in the process of S606 shown in FIG. 28. By doing so, the process of S607 is executed. As a result, the display mode of the effect image showing the character CH1 becomes the action mode, triggered by the reception of the fluctuation start command that is the display control information that can specify that the variable display is started.

During the period when the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and the small symbol is stopped and the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol or the small symbol is derived, the effect indicating the character CH1 which is the character for the change effect is shown. The display mode of the image is the stationary mode. By setting the display layer as shown in FIG. 29 (B), the effect image showing the character CH1 can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing the decorative pattern when viewed from the player, and the decorative pattern can be arranged. It is displayed with priority over the effect image shown. By setting the display mode of the effect image showing the character CH1 arranged at the overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing the decorative pattern to the stationary mode, the player can display the decorative pattern in the variable display. It is possible to clearly recognize that the result has been derived, and it is possible to prevent misidentification of the displayed result.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the full-screen notice effect (predetermined notice effect) is executed, it is shown in FIGS. 40 (B), 42 (B), and 44 (B). As shown, after the execution period of the full-screen notice effect has elapsed (for example, timing T03), the variable display of the decorative symbol (identification information) is started in the forward direction (predetermined direction), so that the movement of the decorative symbol can be understood. It can be prevented from becoming difficult. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the predetermined direction in which the decorative pattern (identification information) is variably displayed is the normal direction (forward direction such as downward direction). For example, as the normal direction (forward direction), the basic variable direction for the variable display (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the direction in which the identification information is mainly displaced in the variable display, the variable direction when there is no notice effect, and the game. It includes the fluctuation direction that the person sees most (exclusively), the fluctuation direction at the time of derivation display, and the like. That is, it is possible to prevent the decorative design (identification information) from becoming difficult to understand in the normal direction (forward direction) in the variable display.

Further, since the full-screen notice effect (predetermined advance notice effect) is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the game will be in an advantageous state, the advance notice effect can raise the expectation of the game. Further, after the execution period of the full-screen notice effect (predetermined notice effect) has elapsed (for example, the timing T03 shown in FIGS. 40 (B), 42 (B), and 44 (B)), the decorative symbol (identification information) Since the variable display (variable display) is started in the predetermined direction of), it is possible to prevent the decorative design (identification information) from becoming difficult to understand.

Further, the image display device 5 (variable display means) sets the decorative pattern (identification information) in a specific direction (for example, the reverse direction shown in FIGS. 41 (B1) and 43 (B1)) different from the predetermined direction (for example, the forward direction). Since it is possible to display the variable display to (etc.), the direction of the variable display becomes various, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40 (B) and 42 (B), the image display device 5 (variable display means) has a decorative symbol (identification information) at least during the execution period of the full-screen notice effect (predetermined notice effect). Is variably displayed in a specific direction, so that the identification information can be variably displayed in the reverse direction (specific direction) and then variably displayed in the forward direction (predetermined direction) different from the reverse direction. The variable display of is a preparatory effect (or preparatory pattern) for the variable display in the forward direction (predetermined direction). In particular, when the specific direction is set to the opposite direction of the predetermined direction as in the present embodiment, it is possible to variably display in the opposite direction (specific direction) and then give momentum to variably display in the predetermined direction. Can provide a variable display with. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, at the start of the variable display in the predetermined direction (forward direction), the symbol advance notice effect (identification information notice) is executed as shown in FIGS. 41 (B1) and 45 (B1) to improve the interest of the game. can. Further, since a plurality of symbol advance notice effects are provided (for example, the blue, green, and red auras shown in FIG. 36 (C) are displayed), a plurality of symbol advance notice effects can be executed, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, when the symbol notice effect (identification information notice) and the full screen notice effect (predetermined notice effect) are executed, they are shown after the end of the full screen notice effect (for example, FIGS. 40 (B) and 44 (B)). At timing T03), as shown in FIGS. 41 (D2) and 45 (D2), the symbol advance notice effect is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the symbol advance notice effect and the full-screen notice effect from being executed at the same time. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the symbol advance notice effect from becoming invisible or difficult to see due to the full-screen advance notice effect. In other words, the recognizability of the symbol advance notice effect can be improved, for example, the player can clearly recognize the symbol advance notice effect.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above includes adjustment means realized by the effect control CPU 120 in cooperation with each unit, and adjustment image display means. The adjustment means can adjust the effect according to the adjustment operation (adjustment operation) by the player at least during the execution of the variable display, and the adjustment image display means adjusts the adjustment result image R (corresponding to the adjustment by the adjustment means). An example of the adjusted image) is displayed at T1 for a predetermined period. Then, when the variable display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period T1, the adjustment image display means makes the adjustment result image R invisible in the derived display period T2 of the variable display result in the predetermined period T1. Since this is done, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result that is derived and displayed.

Although the example in which the volume can be adjusted has been described above, the adjustable effect may be the display brightness of the image display device 5 or the like as described above. Further, the adjustable effect may be at least one of the volume and the brightness (that is, both the volume and the brightness may be adjustable). Further, the adjusted image may be displayed not only when the volume or the like is changed by the adjustment operation but also when the volume is not changed. Further, the adjustment image display means not only makes the adjustment image invisible during the derivation display period T2, but also displays the adjustment image in a semi-transparent manner or blinks during the derivation display period T2. , It may be difficult to see. Even in this way, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result that is derived and displayed. In this case, for example, instead of S712 in FIG. 30, a process of displaying the adjustment result image in a difficult-to-see mode is executed, and the display returns from the display in the difficult-to-see mode in S715 (adjustment within the predetermined period T1). The effect setting process may be modified and configured such as (the image is restored).

Further, when the variable display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period T1, the adjusted image display means cannot or is difficult to see the adjusted result image R in the derived display period T2 of the variable display result in the predetermined period T1. The adjusted image may be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the specific effect image such as the promotion display image P. Even in this way, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result that is derived and displayed. Further, since the adjusted image can be displayed while ensuring the visibility of the specific effect image, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the recognizability of the information displayed on the image display device 5. The specific effect image displayed at a position that does not overlap with the adjustment image is not only the promotion display image P and the development notification image (see FIG. 46 (B)), but also the image showing the character CH1 and the fourth symbol described above. It may be an image showing an image, an image showing a hold display, or the like.

Further, when the variable display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period T1, the adjustment image display means cannot or is difficult to see the adjustment result image R in the derived display period T2 of the variable display result in the predetermined period T1. However, the adjusting means may not adjust the effect of the error notification. Even in this way, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result that is derived and displayed. In addition, since the error sound and the display brightness of the error image can be left as the specified values, it is possible to prevent the player or the game store clerk from noticing the error even though some error has occurred. .. The effect of error notification that the adjusting means does not adjust is not only the error volume, but also the brightness (light intensity) when the error image is displayed, the brightness of the lamp (game effect lamp 9, etc.) that lights up when an error occurs. May be.

Further, at least a part of the display area of the adjusted image may overlap with at least a part of the derived display area of the variable display result (see, for example, FIG. 31 (A1)). In this way, the adjusted image result image that overlaps with at least a part of the derived display area of the variable display result is erased, so that the deterioration of the visibility of the variable display result can be suppressed. The derived display area of the variable display result in which at least a part of the display area of the adjusted image overlaps is not limited to the display area Ar of the decorative symbol (see FIG. 31 (A1)), and the variable display of the effect image showing the small symbol can be displayed. It may be a small symbol display area 5V or the like, which is performed and the display result is derived.

Further, the error image may not be deleted even during the derivation display of the variable display result (see, for example, FIG. 31 (D2)). By doing so, the visibility of the error image can be ensured.

Further, the display of the error image is prioritized over the display of the adjustment image (for example, in the process of S57, until the effect control CPU 120 that has received the abnormality notification command resolves the error indicated by the command, FIG. 31 (D1)). , (For example, to continue displaying the error image as shown in (D2)). Even in this way, the visibility of the error image can be ensured.

Further, when the adjustment operation is performed, the demo display is kept visible (see, for example, FIG. 31 (B)), but when the menu display operation is performed, the demo display is erased (for example, the effect control CPU 120 , S659, S660, S662, etc.). In this way, the demo display can be preferably performed.

Further, a specific effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the change effect character display process of S162) capable of displaying the specific effect image during the execution of the variable display of the identification information is provided, and the specific effect image is at least It can be arranged at overlapping positions on the front side of a part of the identification information (see, for example, FIG. 29B), and the specific effect executing means is the identification information during the period when the variable display result of the identification information is derived. At positions that overlap on the front side, the display mode of the specific effect image may be set to a stationary mode (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of S609). By doing so, it is possible to prevent misidentification of the display result.

Further, the gaming machine is smaller than the first area where the identification information image is displayed (for example, the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right") and is always visible. An effect of executing the processing of the constant display means (for example, S325 and S350) for deriving the display result by performing the variable display of the notification information image in synchronization with the variable display of the identification information image in the area (for example, the small symbol display area 5V). A control CPU 120 or the like) may be provided. In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent misidentification of the display result.

Further, the processing of the information output means (for example, S266) that outputs the display control information (for example, the first fluctuation start command, the second fluctuation start command, etc.) that can specify that the variable display is started according to the determination result of the determination means. The effect execution means may set the display mode of the specific effect image to a non-stationary mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of S607) when the display control information is received. Part etc.). In this way, it is possible to prevent misidentification of the display result while suppressing the discomfort of the specific effect.

Further, the specific effect image can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of at least a part of the identification information image (see, for example, FIG. 29B), and the specific effect executing means can use the identification information. During the period in which the display result of the image is derived, the display mode of the specific effect image may be a temporary stop mode at a position overlapping on the front side of the identification information image. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the production while preventing misunderstanding of the display result.

Further, the period during which the adjusted image is invisible or difficult to see is not limited to the derived display period T2 of the variable display result. The adjusted image may be invisible or difficult to see during the reach action (for example, during full rotation). That is, the period for making the adjusted image invisible may be a predetermined period during which the target to be recognized by the player is notified. Further, the adjusted image may be displayed at a position superimposed on the specific effect image such as the promotion display image P. Further, the effect of the error notification may be adjustable by the adjusting means. Further, the display area of the adjusted image does not have to overlap with the derived display area of the variable display result.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and is shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a part of the configuration.

(Modification example 1)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 40 (B) and 42 (B), the execution period of the full-screen notice effect and the execution period of the reverse direction variation completely match, that is, the full-screen notice. Although the effect and the reverse direction variation start at the same timing and end at the same timing, the execution period of the full-screen notice effect may be shorter than the execution period of the reverse direction variation as shown in FIG. 47. In FIG. 47, the reverse fluctuation starts at the timing at the start of the fluctuation (that is, the timing T11) and ends at the timing T14. On the other hand, the full-screen notice effect starts at the timing T12 later than the timing T11 and ends at the timing T13 before the timing T14. According to the first modification, the variation (variable display) of the decorative symbol in the opposite direction (upward direction) becomes visible in the period of timings T11 to T12 and the period of timings T13 to T14. The variation of the decorative symbol in the opposite direction (upward direction) may be visible only in either the period of timings T11 to T12 or the period of timings T13 to T14.

(Modification 2)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41 (C1), the reverse direction variation of the decorative symbol is assumed to fluctuate in the reverse direction by about one decorative symbol, but in the second modification, it is shown in FIG. It is configured so that the type of the symbol reverse start display can be selected. Specifically, the modification 2 has a process (S523A) for determining the type of symbol reverse start as shown in FIG. 48 (A), and has a plurality of types (for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (B)). It has three types: "small", "medium", and "large"). The "small" type reversely fluctuates one decorative symbol, the "medium" type reversely fluctuates two decorative symbols, and the "large" type reversely fluctuates three decorative symbols. By the process of S523A, one type of reverse variation is selected from these three types. Specifically, in the process of S523A, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the symbol reverse direction start display type, and also extracts the extracted numerical data and the symbol reverse start display shown in FIG. 48 (B). Using the type determination table, the type of the symbol reverse start display, that is, the mode of the reverse variation of the decorative symbol is determined. For example, as shown in FIG. 48 (B), in the case of the non-reach fluctuation pattern, it is determined to be "small", and in the case of the super reach (loss) fluctuation pattern, "small" is 50% and "medium" is 40. %, "Large" is determined with a probability of 10%, and in the case of a super reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern, "Small" is determined with a probability of 10%, "Medium" is determined with a probability of 30%, and "Large" is determined with a probability of 60%. NS. As for the jackpot expectation, the amount of reversion of the decorative symbol increases in the order of small <medium <large, and it is possible to have a sense of expectation of a jackpot regarding the type of reverse fluctuation of the decorative symbol (difference in the amount of reversion of the symbol). It is possible to have fun about the symbol reverse start display, and the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, a plurality of types of full-screen notice effects may be provided, and the type of full-screen notice may be selectable. For example, as the types of full-screen notice effects, those with different execution periods of full-screen notice effects, those with different transparency, those with different notification contents shown in FIG. 41 (C2), and output sounds output when these are displayed. Some have different (sound effects, music, etc.), some have a combination of two or more of these, and the expectation of a big hit may be different. The longer the execution period, the lower the transparency, the higher the effect of the notification, the louder the output sound, or the specific output sound among the notification contents shown in FIG. 41 (C2), the higher the expectation of a big hit. good.

(Modification example 3)
In the above embodiment, the decorative symbol can be changed in the reverse direction (reverse start shown in FIGS. 41 (B1) and (C1)) as shown in FIG. 40, but is reversed as shown in FIGS. 49 and 50. It may be possible to swing instead of changing the direction (modification example 3). In the third modification, the reverse direction in S322C and S522 shown in FIGS. 34 and 37 may be replaced with the swing, and the reverse direction in S345A and S345B shown in FIG. 39 may be replaced with the swing. In FIG. 49 (A), it is determined that the full-screen advance notice effect is not executed, and the swing display of the decorative symbol and the symbol advance notice effect are started at the timing T01. The symbol notice effect ends at timing T02, and the swing display ends at timing T03. At the end of this swing display (timing T03), the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate in the forward direction. Looking at the production execution example at this time, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed at the reference position Ref in the previous variation display, and then shaken as shown in FIG. 50 (B1). At the same time as the dynamic display is started, a symbol advance notice effect as shown in FIG. 50 (B1), that is, an image G of an aura (halo) of a predetermined color (for example, blue, green, red, etc.) is formed around the decorative symbol. The displayed notice effect will also start. Then, the oscillating display continues as shown in FIG. 50 (C1), and at the end of the oscillating display shown in FIG. 49 (A) (timing T03), the reference position Ref as shown in FIG. 50 (D1). The forward variation of the decorative pattern in is started.

On the other hand, in FIG. 49B, since it is determined that the full-screen advance notice effect is executed, the symbol advance notice effect is changed from the initial value of the timing T01 to the timing T03. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) is started as shown in FIG. 50 (B2), and is included in the full-screen notice effect as shown in FIG. 50 (C2). A notification image such as "chance!" Is displayed, and the symbol is displayed after the full-screen notice effect of FIG. 50 (C2) is completed, that is, when the forward variation of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. 50 (D2). It has been changed so that the notice production will start. That is, the start of the symbol advance notice effect is changed not at the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 50 (B1) but after the end of the full screen advance notice effect (blackout effect) shown in FIG. 50 (D2). As a result, it is possible to prevent the symbol advance notice effect from being hidden behind the full-screen advance notice effect and being hidden. Although the swing display of the decorative pattern is executed without change, it is visible to the player because it is hidden behind the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in FIGS. 50 (B2) and (C2). No.

In the above-described embodiment, the full-screen notice effect, the symbol advance notice effect, and the symbol reverse direction start display are determined by lottery as shown in FIGS. 34 to 37, but the full-screen notice effect is as shown in FIG. 24. A variation pattern (referred to as a special variation pattern) including at least one of an effect, a symbol advance notice effect, and a symbol reverse start display may be provided.

In the above embodiment, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are provided on the screen of the image display device 5, and the decorative symbols are variably displayed. It has been described that the small symbol display area 5V is provided and the small symbol is variably displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the small symbol display area 5V is not provided, the decorative symbol is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to show the decorative symbol. The variable display of may be feasible. Even in this case, the effect image showing the character or the like to be the specific effect image can be arranged at the overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing the decorative pattern to be the identification information image, and the display result in the variable display of the decorative pattern can be obtained. In the derived period, the display mode of the specific effect image displayed at the overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing the decorative pattern may be the stationary mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent misidentification of the display result in the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In addition, instead of variably displaying the effect image showing the decorative pattern, or by displaying the effect image prepared in advance as an animation together with such a variable display, it corresponds to the variable display of the special pattern in the special figure game. When the display effect of the variable display is derived and the display result in the variable display of the special symbol is derived, the animation display of the effect image is interrupted or paused, and the display result of the variable display is displayed in a recognizable manner. The display result may be derived separately from. In this way, it is possible to execute the related display that derives the display result in relation to the decision result of whether or not to control the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state), and the overlapping position on the front side of the effect image in this related display. When the specific effect image can be arranged in, the display mode of the specific effect image may be a stationary mode during the period in which the display result in the related display is derived.

In the above embodiment, when the pre-reading notice effect of "hold display change" is executed, an effect image showing a character used in the hold display change effect can be displayed as a specific effect image over a plurality of variable displays. Explained as being. On the other hand, for example, along with the look-ahead notice effect of "hold display change", a different look-ahead notice effect can be executed simultaneously over a plurality of variable displays, and a character used in a part or all of the look-ahead notice effect is shown. The effect image may be arranged at overlapping positions on the front side of the effect image showing the decorative pattern. In this case, among the effect images used in the look-ahead advance notice effect, the effect image arranged at the overlapping position on the front side of the identification information image is set as the specific effect image, and the display result is derived whether the display is variable or not. Depending on the period, whether the display mode is the action mode or the stationary mode may be different.

In the above embodiment, as an example of the specific effect image, the effect image showing the character used in the hold display change effect is displayed. On the other hand, as a specific effect image, the display is started during the variable display in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed or before the start of the variable display, and is continuously displayed even during the period when the display result in the variable display is derived. Any production image may be used. For example, a production image showing a special character or the like over a plurality of variable displays corresponding to a period in which the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probabilistic state (high probability high base state or high probability low base state) is a decorative pattern. It may be displayed so that it can be arranged at overlapping positions on the front side of the effect image showing. Alternatively, the effect image showing a special character or the like over a plurality of variable displays corresponds to the period in which the effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a special effect mode different from the normal effect mode, rather than the effect image showing the decorative pattern. May also be displayed so that it can be arranged at overlapping positions on the front side. In this way, as a specific effect image, an effect image showing a special character or the like over a plurality of variable displays is displayed so that it can be arranged at overlapping positions on the front side of the effect image showing a decorative pattern, and is displayed in the variable display. During the period in which the display result is derived, the display mode of the specific effect image may be a stationary mode.

The effect image showing the character may be, for example, a person, an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or an effect image showing any other figure. During the variable display in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed, the display mode of the specific effect image may be set as the action mode by reproducing and displaying the moving image as the specific effect image. In this case, during the period in which the display result in the variable display is derived, the display mode of the specific effect image may be set to the stationary mode by pausing the reproduction of the moving image.

When the effect image showing the decorative pattern of 1 becomes the identification information image, the effect image to be the specific effect image is arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing a part of the decorative pattern of 1. It may be one, or it may be arranged at overlapping positions on the front side of the effect image showing the whole of one decorative pattern. When the effect image showing a plurality of decorative patterns becomes an identification information image, the effect image to be a specific effect image is an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing a part of the decorative patterns among the plurality of decorative patterns. It may be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing all the decorative patterns.

The type and portion of the identification information image in which the effect image to be the specific effect image can be arranged on the front side may be different depending on at least one of the game state and the effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state (low probability low base state), regardless of whether the decorative symbol is a normal symbol or a probabilistic symbol, it is on the front side of the effect image showing the decorative symbol. It is possible to place an effect image that is a specific effect image at an overlapping position. On the other hand, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probabilistic state (high probability high base state or high probability low base state), the front side of the plurality of decorative symbols overlaps with the effect image showing the normal symbol. While it is possible to place an effect image that is a specific effect image at a position, the effect image that is a specific effect image is not arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image that shows the probability variation pattern among a plurality of decorative symbols. You may. In this case, when the game state is the probability change state, the player's attention to the fact that the probability change symbol is derived by the jackpot combination and the probability change state continues is prevented from being hindered by the display of the specific effect image. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, for example, when the effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal effect mode, an effect image that becomes a specific effect image is displayed at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing the decorative symbol regardless of the symbol number of the decorative symbol. Can be placed. On the other hand, when the effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a special effect mode different from the normal effect mode over a plurality of variable displays, for example, a decorative symbol with a specific symbol number associated with a specific person is shown. The production image that is the specific production image may not be arranged at the overlapping position on the front side of the production image. As described above, the specific effect image may be arranged at least at an overlapping position on the front side of a part of the identification information image.

In the above embodiment, it has been described that the display mode is set to the stationary mode for all the effect images to be the specific effect image during the period in which the display result in the variable display such as the decorative pattern to be the identification information image is derived. On the other hand, at least a part of the specific effect image arranged at the overlapping position on the front side of the effect image of the decorative pattern may be displayed in a stationary state.

In the above embodiment, during the period in which the display result in the variable display such as the decorative symbol is derived, the display of the effect symbol that becomes the specific effect image arranged at the overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing the decorative symbol. The embodiment has been described as being a stationary embodiment. On the other hand, when there is an effect image (rear arrangement image) arranged on the rear side of the effect image showing the decorative pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed during the period when the display result in the variable display is derived. The rearward arrangement image may be displayed in the same display mode as during the variable display. For example, a background image display layer is provided as a display layer in which a value larger than the Z value of the effect image drawn on the decorative pattern display layer shown in FIG. 29B is assigned and the display priority is lowered. May be good. An effect image serving as a background image is drawn on the background image layer. The Z value may be set so that the background image display layer is arranged on the rearmost side when viewed from the player. In this case, during the period in which the display result in the variable display is derived, the display mode of the effect image, which is the background image arranged at the overlapping position or the non-overlapping position on the rear side of the effect image showing the decorative pattern, is variably displayed. The display mode may be the same as the inside. As a result, the effect image that can cause misunderstanding of the display result such as the specific effect image is set to the still mode, while the effect image that does not cause misunderstanding of the display result such as the background image is displayed in the same manner as during the variable display. By using the mode, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort with respect to the display of the effect image.

In the above embodiment, during the variable display in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed, the display mode of the effect image that is the specific effect image is set as the action mode, while the display result in the variable display is derived. The display mode of the effect image, which is the specific effect image arranged in front of the effect image showing the decorative pattern, which is the identification information image, is described as the stationary mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the period in which the display result in the variable display is derived, the display of the effect image which is the specific effect image arranged at the overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing the decorative pattern. The mode may be an idling mode different from the stationary mode. As the idling mode, a temporary stop mode may be set so that the display mode of the specific effect image is different from that of the action mode in the above embodiment as long as the display result is not misidentified.

In addition, during the variable display in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, for example, an effect image for notifying the message "design change in progress" as a character line may be displayed as a specific effect image. On the other hand, during the period in which the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol is derived, for example, an effect image for notifying the message of "design confirmation" as a character's dialogue may be displayed as a specific effect image. In this way, the display mode of the specific effect image is different by changing the content of the message notified as the character's dialogue depending on whether the variable display is in progress or the display result is derived. May be good.

When an effect image (character image) showing a character consisting of a plurality of parts is displayed as a specific effect image, during the period in which the display result in the variable display is derived, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed. May display a specific effect image in a different display mode.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 may not perform variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol. As an example, based on the detection of a game ball that has passed (entered) the starting winning opening provided in the game area, the variable winning device provided in the game area is opened from the closed state (second state) (second state). When the game ball that has changed to the first state) and entered the inside of the variable winning device enters a specific area (V winning opening) among a plurality of areas, it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player. It may be configured to be. In such a configuration, based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the starting winning opening, the result of deciding whether or not to change the variable winning device to the first state, or changing to the first state. In relation to at least one of the determination result in which the change mode of the time is one of a plurality of modes, or the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state according to the passing state of the game ball inside the variable winning device. , In the period when the display result in the related display is derived when the related effect for deriving the display result can be executed and the specific effect image can be placed at the overlapping position on the front side of the effect image in the related display. , The display mode of the specific effect image may be a stationary mode.

In the above embodiment, as an advantageous state advantageous for the player, it has been described that the variable display result is controlled to the big hit game state based on the "big hit". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special gaming state such as a probability variation state may be set as an advantageous state, and the maximum number of rounds that can be executed among a plurality of jackpot gaming states is the number of second rounds (for example, "7"). The jackpot gaming state in which the number of first rounds (for example, "15") is larger than that of ") may be set as an advantageous state. Alternatively, the time saving state in which the upper limit of the variable display that can be executed among the plurality of time saving states is the first number (for example, "100"), which is larger than the second number (for example, "50"), may be set as an advantageous state. , The probabilistic state in which the jackpot probability is the first probability (for example, 1/20) higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50) among the plurality of probabilistic states may be set as the advantageous state. In addition, any gaming state that is advantageous to the player may be set as an advantageous state.

When the hold display change effect is executed, a limit effect that limits the hold display may be executed. For the restriction effect, for example, an effect image for display restriction is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and semi-transparent display, transparent display, or reduced display is performed on the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL. This, or by shifting the production model (movable member) from the retracted state to the advanced state and hiding the hold display when in the advanced state, the player cannot see or visually recognize a part or all of the hold display. Anything that limits it so that it becomes difficult may be used.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot type determined by the process of S242 shown in FIG. 22 includes "probability variation", and the probability variation control condition is satisfied based on the determination result of the jackpot type being "probability variation". However, it was explained that it is controlled to the probabilistic state after the end of the big hit game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball that has won (entered) a large winning opening (second major winning opening) is detected by a probabilistic change detection switch in a probabilistic attacker provided at a predetermined position in the game area. The probability variation control condition is satisfied based on the above, and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be controlled to the probability variation state. The big winning opening (second big winning opening) of the probability change attacker can change from the closed state to the open state when the number of executions of the round game in the big hit game state is a predetermined number of times (for example, "16"), and the round When the number of times the game is executed is other than the predetermined number of times, the game may remain closed and cannot be changed to the open state. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can establish the probability variation control condition based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the specific region in the attacker, which is an example of the special variable winning device provided in the gaming area. It may be configured to be.

The special symbol and the decorative symbol are not limited to those that are variably displayed as a plurality of types of identification information. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured by using a plurality of LEDs, and during the variable display of the special symbol, only a specific (single) LED among the plurality of LEDs is used. Repeats turning on and off, and the other LEDs remain off. Then, when the variable display result is "missing", the LED that repeats turning on and off is maintained in a state of emitting (lighting) with a predetermined emission color, or by maintaining a state of being turned off. Stop display the special symbol. At this time, the other LEDs are kept off. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "big hit", the special symbol is stopped and displayed by a predetermined lighting pattern in which some or all of the LEDs are lit. In this way, during the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, a specific (single) symbol can be switched between display and non-display, while other symbols remain hidden. good. Then, as the final stop symbol (fixed special symbol or final decorative symbol) that results in the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol, any one of a plurality of types of symbols may be derived and displayed (stop display). Further, for example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured by using a 7-segment LED, and during the variable display of the special symbol, a symbol indicating "-" is displayed (lit). It may be hidden (turned off) repeatedly so that other numbers and symbols are not displayed. Then, as a variable display result of the special symbol, the symbol indicating "-" is not stopped and displayed, and a predetermined lighting pattern including the numbers indicating "1" to "9" and other symbols is obtained. By doing so, the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In this way, during the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, the symbols that are not stopped and displayed as a variable display result can be switched between display and non-display, while the other symbols are maintained in the hidden state. You may.

In the above embodiment, the "ratio" and "probability" at which various decisions are made are 0% (never determined) or 100% (always), for example, 70:30. It may be set so that it will not be (determined), or at least the probability of one of the determination results will be 0% (never determined) or 100% (always determined). It may be set. For example, in the case of making various decisions, if the ratio of one of a plurality of decision results to be a decision result is higher than the ratio of other decision results, the ratio of one decision result is It may be included that it is 100%, or it may be included that the ratio of other determination results is 0%. When the ratio of 1 as the determination result is 100%, the ratio of other determination results is 0%. Further, when the ratio of other decision results is 0%, if the ratio of 1 decision result is a predetermined ratio other than 100% but not 0%, the ratio of 1 decision result is the other decision result. It will be higher than the ratio.

In the above embodiment, one variation pattern designation command is transmitted when the variable display is started in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the variation pattern indicating the variable display time, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol, and the like. Although an example is shown, the fluctuation pattern may be notified to the effect control board 12 side by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 has the presence or absence of pseudo-continuous fluctuation, the presence or absence of slipping effect, etc. in the first command before reaching (when not reaching). Is sent a command indicating the variable display time and variable display mode (before the so-called second stop), and the second command is after reaching the reach (reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect, etc.). If this is not the case, a command indicating the variable display time or variable display mode (after the so-called second stop) may be transmitted. In this case, in the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform the effect control in the variable display based on the variable display time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the variable display time by each of the two commands, and the effect control CPU 120 selects the specific variable display mode to be executed at each timing. You may do it. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the first command is sent (for example, in the next timer interrupt). ) You may send a second command. The variable display mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern designation command.

Further, in the above, the example in which the pre-reading judgment is performed on the main side and the command corresponding to the judgment result is transmitted to the sub side is shown, but the command indicating the random value is transmitted from the main side and the pre-reading judgment is performed on the sub side. You may try to do it.

A configuration example in which the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above are combined will be described. A configuration example in which the first embodiment and the second embodiment are combined is shown below, for example.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present application (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, 600) is a gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like), and identification information (for example, a decorative pattern). Variable display means (for example, image display device 5) that variably displays (for example, etc.) in a predetermined direction, and notice effect execution means (for example, step S322A) that can execute a predetermined advance notice effect (for example, full-screen notice effect). , CPU 120 for effect control that executes the process of S344A), a moving body (for example, movable body 302) that can move between the first position and a second position different from the first position, and the moving body. A first regulating unit (for example, drive bodies 310L, 310R) that regulates the movement of the moving body to the side opposite to the first position when the moving body moves from the first position to the second position, and the first When the movement of the moving body is restricted by the regulating unit at the second position, the second regulating unit that regulates the movement of the moving body to the side opposite to the first position via the first regulating unit ( For example, the lower parts 336L, 336R of the cover members 307L, 307R) and the first impact mitigating means (for example, the first elastic members 334L, 334R) for alleviating the impact generated between the moving body and the first regulating portion. A second impact mitigating means (for example, second elastic members 335L, 335R) for alleviating an impact generated between the first regulating portion and the second regulating portion is provided (see, for example, FIGS. 8 and 9). ), The predetermined advance notice effect is executed so as to make the display mode of the identification information invisible or difficult to see at the start of the variable display (for example, by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S322A and S344A). , FIG. 41 (B2), FIG. 43 (B2) or FIG. 45 (B2), such as a blackout effect in which the decorative pattern becomes invisible), the identification information is used when the predetermined advance notice effect is executed. In addition, it is possible to start the variable display in the predetermined direction after the execution period of the predetermined advance notice effect has elapsed (for example, by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S322A), FIGS. 41 (B2) and 43. After the execution period of the blackout effect shown in (B2) or 45 (B2) has elapsed, the decoration is as shown in FIGS. 41 (D2), (E2), 43 (D), (E) or 45 (D2). The feature is that the movement of the symbol in the forward direction is started, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the moving body can be suitably regulated at the second position, and the impact generated when the movement of the moving body is regulated can be effectively alleviated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load due to the impact from being concentrated on the moving body or a part of the regulating portion (first regulating portion or the second regulating portion) and being damaged.

Further, the movement of the moving body from the first position to the second position may be executed during the advance notice effect or before or after the advance notice effect. Specifically, it may be executed before the start of the variable display in which the advance notice effect is executed, or immediately before or immediately after the advance notice effect is executed so as to make the display mode of the identification information invisible or difficult to see at the start of the advance notice effect. You may go to. Alternatively, it may be performed immediately after the advance notice effect is executed or after the advance notice effect is executed. Even when the moving body is moved from the first position to the second position at these timings, damage to the moving body or a part of the regulating portion can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress abnormalities in the production due to damage to the moving body or the like during the production.

Further, the jackpot expectation may be changed according to the timing at which the moving body is moved from the first position to the second position. For example, when a plurality of timings for the moving body to move from the first position to the second position are set, the later the moving timing of the moving body, the higher the expectation of a big hit. In this case, since it is possible to suppress the abnormality of the movement timing of the moving body related to the change in the jackpot expectation degree, it is possible to suppress the distrust given to the player.

Further, the second position of the moving body is the front of the variable display means, and when the moving body moves to the second position, the identification information may be invisible or difficult for the player to see. In this case, a moving body may be used to perform a warning effect that is executed so that the display mode of the identification information is invisible or difficult to see at the start of the variable display. By executing this advance notice effect using the moving body, the identification information can be made invisible or difficult to see instead of displaying the image, so that the player can feel that the identification information is hidden. In addition, it is possible to suppress abnormalities in the effect due to damage to the moving body or the like when performing such an effect.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, when performing the advance notice effect, an effect that prompts the player to operate the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B may be executed. Here, by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, the player may perform a special effect different from the case where these are not operated. By performing such a production, it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, the variable display means may be provided on the outside of the main body of the gaming machine. Since the variable display means is provided on the outside of the main body of the gaming machine, the degree of freedom of production can be increased, which can contribute to the improvement of the interest. Further, when the variable display means can be concealed by a moving body or a concealed object, the structure of the moving body or the like can be easily facilitated.

Further, the variable display means may be movable. In this case, the improvement of the interest and the ease of the structure of the moving body can be further enhanced. Examples of the movable variable display means include a small liquid crystal display device (sub liquid crystal display device), a small display device such as a 7-segment LED, and an actuator device including a motor and an arm for driving the small display device. It may be provided with. When the variable display means is movable, the moving body may also be able to move in accordance with the movement of the variable display means.

Further, when executing the notice effect, a moving body effect (movable body effect) using a moving body may be executed together with the notice effect. In the notice production, the display mode of the identification information is invisible or difficult to see, and the display of the variable display means is difficult to see, and there is a concern that the interest may be reduced. Can be suppressed. The moving body effect may be, for example, an effect in which a lamp, a monitor, or the like is provided on the movable body to display something on the moving body. In this case, in the advance notice effect, an image or the like pointing to the moving body may be displayed on the variable display means, or the movement of the moving body may be guided by voice. With these displays and guidance, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the moving body effect by the moving body. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Although examples of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and any changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Is done.

For example, in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a gaming ball having a predetermined number of balls is inside the gaming machine. The number of rented balls lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is stored in the game. In these enclosed gaming machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and a prize is awarded according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It is also applicable to slot machines where is possible.

Further, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game medium such as a medal. It may be.

Further, the present invention can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 1 but also to slot machines and the like. The slot machine is an arbitrary game machine capable of performing a predetermined game such as variable display of a symbol serving as a plurality of types of identification information and giving a predetermined game value based on the game result, and more specifically. Is a variable display that enables the game to be started by setting a predetermined number of bets (number of medals or credits) for one game, and variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified by each. One game ends when the display result of the device (for example, multiple reels, etc.) is derived and displayed, and a prize (for example, cherry prize, watermelon prize, bell prize, replay prize, BB prize, BB prize, etc. It is a gaming machine that can generate RB prizes, etc.). In such a slot machine, the hardware resources including the effect movable mechanism provided on the front side of the slot machine and the software that performs a predetermined process cooperate with each other to perform the pachinko machine shown in the above embodiment. It suffices that it is configured to have all or a part of the features of the gaming machine 1. Specifically, the display result in the variable display of the identification information is derived in the configuration in which the specific effect can be executed at the overlapping position on the front side of the display surface on which the symbol as the identification information is variably displayed. In the overlapping position on the front side of the identification information during the above period, the effect mode of the specific effect may be different from the effect mode during the variable display, such as a stationary mode or a temporary stop mode. ..

The slot machine is formed with a housing (base portion) provided with reels in which multiple types of symbols are arranged inside, and a see-through window that is rotatably pivotally supported at the side end of the housing to allow the reels to be visually recognized. It has a front door body. A moving body may be provided in front of the reel in such a slot machine, and the position above the front position of the reel may be the first position and the position in front of the reel may be the second position. In this way, the moving body can be provided even in the slot machine.

In addition, various effects including the device configuration and data configuration of the game machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display device, the audio output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decorative LED. The operation and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but a score is scored based on the occurrence of a winning by enclosing the gaming medium. It can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine that grants. Slot machines are not limited to those in which the number of bets is set using medals and credits as the game value, but only slot machines that set the number of bets using game balls as the game value and credits as the game value. It may be a fully credited slot machine that sets the number of bets using. When using a game ball as a game medium, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls. For example, when setting 3 as the bet number, 15 game balls are used for the bet number. Corresponds to the one that sets. The pachinko game machine 1 and the slot machine are not limited to those using only one of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and game balls, and for example, a plurality of types such as medals and game balls. It may be possible to use the value for games together. For example, a slot machine can play a game by setting a bet number using any of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and a plurality of medals, game balls, etc. are generated depending on the occurrence of a prize. Any of the types of gaming value may be payable.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are limited to a form in which the program and data are distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in the gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine. It may be distributed by pre-installing it in a storage device such as a computer device in advance. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

1 Pachinko game machine 300 Production unit 301 Base unit 302 Movable body 302A 1st movable part 302B 2nd movable part 303L, 303R 1st guide means 306L, 306R Guide shaft 310L, 310R Drive body 319 2nd guide means 327 Vertical part 328 Curved Part 329 Bending part 334L, 334R First elastic member 335L, 335R Second elastic member

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that is capable of playing and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player .
A variable display means that variably displays the identification information in a predetermined direction,
And the announcement attraction execution means capable of executing a predetermined announcement attraction,
With
Said predetermined announcement attraction is performed so as to the variable display of the identification information visually disabled or concealment,
The identification information that is stopped and displayed is started in a specific direction different from the predetermined direction. After the specific start is executed, the predetermined advance notice effect is executed, and after the end of the predetermined advance notice effect, the identification information is transferred to the predetermined direction. Variable display can be started,
It is possible to execute a specific effect in a display area common to the predetermined advance notice effect, and
When the predetermined advance notice effect is executed, the specific effect can be executed at the first timing.
When the predetermined advance notice effect is not executed, the specific effect can be executed at a second timing different from the first timing.
Along with the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect, it is possible to display a suggestion display suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled.
The suggestion display is displayed with priority over the predetermined advance notice effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images